|
/* $Header: /cvsroot/esrg/sfesrg/esrgpcpj/shared/tk_base/tkfont.c,v 1.1.1.1 2001/06/13 05:00:58 dtashley Exp $ */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* tkFont.c -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This file maintains a database of fonts for the Tk toolkit. |
|
|
* It also provides several utility procedures for measuring and |
|
|
* displaying text. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. |
|
|
* Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution |
|
|
* of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* RCS: @(#) $Id: tkfont.c,v 1.1.1.1 2001/06/13 05:00:58 dtashley Exp $ |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
#include "tkPort.h" |
|
|
#include "tkInt.h" |
|
|
#include "tkFont.h" |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that |
|
|
* exist in the current application. It must be stored in the |
|
|
* TkMainInfo for the application. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct TkFontInfo { |
|
|
Tcl_HashTable fontCache; /* Map a string to an existing Tk_Font. |
|
|
* Keys are string font names, values are |
|
|
* TkFont pointers. */ |
|
|
Tcl_HashTable namedTable; /* Map a name to a set of attributes for a |
|
|
* font, used when constructing a Tk_Font from |
|
|
* a named font description. Keys are |
|
|
* strings, values are NamedFont pointers. */ |
|
|
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* Application that owns this structure. */ |
|
|
int updatePending; /* Non-zero when a World Changed event has |
|
|
* already been queued to handle a change to |
|
|
* a named font. */ |
|
|
} TkFontInfo; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes |
|
|
* for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted |
|
|
* when the last reference to it goes away. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct NamedFont { |
|
|
int refCount; /* Number of users of named font. */ |
|
|
int deletePending; /* Non-zero if font should be deleted when |
|
|
* last reference goes away. */ |
|
|
TkFontAttributes fa; /* Desired attributes for named font. */ |
|
|
} NamedFont; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following two structures are used to keep track of string |
|
|
* measurement information when using the text layout facilities. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* A LayoutChunk represents a contiguous range of text that can be measured |
|
|
* and displayed by low-level text calls. In general, chunks will be |
|
|
* delimited by newlines and tabs. Low-level, platform-specific things |
|
|
* like kerning and non-integer character widths may occur between the |
|
|
* characters in a single chunk, but not between characters in different |
|
|
* chunks. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* A TextLayout is a collection of LayoutChunks. It can be displayed with |
|
|
* respect to any origin. It is the implementation of the Tk_TextLayout |
|
|
* opaque token. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct LayoutChunk { |
|
|
CONST char *start; /* Pointer to simple string to be displayed. |
|
|
* This is a pointer into the TkTextLayout's |
|
|
* string. */ |
|
|
int numBytes; /* The number of bytes in this chunk. */ |
|
|
int numChars; /* The number of characters in this chunk. */ |
|
|
int numDisplayChars; /* The number of characters to display when |
|
|
* this chunk is displayed. Can be less than |
|
|
* numChars if extra space characters were |
|
|
* absorbed by the end of the chunk. This |
|
|
* will be < 0 if this is a chunk that is |
|
|
* holding a tab or newline. */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* The origin of the first character in this |
|
|
* chunk with respect to the upper-left hand |
|
|
* corner of the TextLayout. */ |
|
|
int totalWidth; /* Width in pixels of this chunk. Used |
|
|
* when hit testing the invisible spaces at |
|
|
* the end of a chunk. */ |
|
|
int displayWidth; /* Width in pixels of the displayable |
|
|
* characters in this chunk. Can be less than |
|
|
* width if extra space characters were |
|
|
* absorbed by the end of the chunk. */ |
|
|
} LayoutChunk; |
|
|
|
|
|
typedef struct TextLayout { |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* The font used when laying out the text. */ |
|
|
CONST char *string; /* The string that was layed out. */ |
|
|
int width; /* The maximum width of all lines in the |
|
|
* text layout. */ |
|
|
int numChunks; /* Number of chunks actually used in |
|
|
* following array. */ |
|
|
LayoutChunk chunks[1]; /* Array of chunks. The actual size will |
|
|
* be maxChunks. THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST |
|
|
* IN THE STRUCTURE. */ |
|
|
} TextLayout; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structures are used as two-way maps between the values for |
|
|
* the fields in the TkFontAttributes structure and the strings used in |
|
|
* Tcl, when parsing both option-value format and style-list format font |
|
|
* name strings. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap weightMap[] = { |
|
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "normal"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "bold"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_UNKNOWN, NULL} |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap slantMap[] = { |
|
|
{TK_FS_ROMAN, "roman"}, |
|
|
{TK_FS_ITALIC, "italic"}, |
|
|
{TK_FS_UNKNOWN, NULL} |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap underlineMap[] = { |
|
|
{1, "underline"}, |
|
|
{0, NULL} |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap overstrikeMap[] = { |
|
|
{1, "overstrike"}, |
|
|
{0, NULL} |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structures are used when parsing XLFD's into a set of |
|
|
* TkFontAttributes. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap xlfdWeightMap[] = { |
|
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "normal"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "medium"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "book"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "light"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "bold"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "demi"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "demibold"}, |
|
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, NULL} /* Assume anything else is "normal". */ |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap xlfdSlantMap[] = { |
|
|
{TK_FS_ROMAN, "r"}, |
|
|
{TK_FS_ITALIC, "i"}, |
|
|
{TK_FS_OBLIQUE, "o"}, |
|
|
{TK_FS_ROMAN, NULL} /* Assume anything else is "roman". */ |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static TkStateMap xlfdSetwidthMap[] = { |
|
|
{TK_SW_NORMAL, "normal"}, |
|
|
{TK_SW_CONDENSE, "narrow"}, |
|
|
{TK_SW_CONDENSE, "semicondensed"}, |
|
|
{TK_SW_CONDENSE, "condensed"}, |
|
|
{TK_SW_UNKNOWN, NULL} |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structure and defines specify the valid builtin options |
|
|
* when configuring a set of font attributes. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *fontOpt[] = { |
|
|
"-family", |
|
|
"-size", |
|
|
"-weight", |
|
|
"-slant", |
|
|
"-underline", |
|
|
"-overstrike", |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
#define FONT_FAMILY 0 |
|
|
#define FONT_SIZE 1 |
|
|
#define FONT_WEIGHT 2 |
|
|
#define FONT_SLANT 3 |
|
|
#define FONT_UNDERLINE 4 |
|
|
#define FONT_OVERSTRIKE 5 |
|
|
#define FONT_NUMFIELDS 6 |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Hardcoded font aliases. These are used to describe (mostly) identical |
|
|
* fonts whose names differ from platform to platform. If the |
|
|
* user-supplied font name matches any of the names in one of the alias |
|
|
* lists, the other names in the alias list are also automatically tried. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *timesAliases[] = { |
|
|
"Times", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
"Times New Roman", /* Windows. */ |
|
|
"New York", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *helveticaAliases[] = { |
|
|
"Helvetica", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
"Arial", /* Windows. */ |
|
|
"Geneva", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *courierAliases[] = { |
|
|
"Courier", /* Unix and Mac. */ |
|
|
"Courier New", /* Windows. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *minchoAliases[] = { |
|
|
"mincho", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
"\357\274\255\357\274\263 \346\230\216\346\234\235", |
|
|
/* Windows (MS mincho). */ |
|
|
"\346\234\254\346\230\216\346\234\235\342\210\222\357\274\255", |
|
|
/* Mac (honmincho-M). */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *gothicAliases[] = { |
|
|
"gothic", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
"\357\274\255\357\274\263 \343\202\264\343\202\267\343\203\203\343\202\257", |
|
|
/* Windows (MS goshikku). */ |
|
|
"\344\270\270\343\202\264\343\202\267\343\203\203\343\202\257\342\210\222\357\274\255", |
|
|
/* Mac (goshikku-M). */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *dingbatsAliases[] = { |
|
|
"dingbats", "zapfdingbats", "itc zapfdingbats", |
|
|
/* Unix. */ |
|
|
/* Windows. */ |
|
|
"zapf dingbats", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char **fontAliases[] = { |
|
|
timesAliases, |
|
|
helveticaAliases, |
|
|
courierAliases, |
|
|
minchoAliases, |
|
|
gothicAliases, |
|
|
dingbatsAliases, |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Hardcoded font classes. If the character cannot be found in the base |
|
|
* font, the classes are examined in order to see if some other similar |
|
|
* font should be examined also. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *systemClass[] = { |
|
|
"fixed", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
/* Windows. */ |
|
|
"chicago", "osaka", "sistemny", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *serifClass[] = { |
|
|
"times", "palatino", "mincho", /* All platforms. */ |
|
|
"song ti", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
"ms serif", "simplified arabic", /* Windows. */ |
|
|
"latinski", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *sansClass[] = { |
|
|
"helvetica", "gothic", /* All platforms. */ |
|
|
/* Unix. */ |
|
|
"ms sans serif", "traditional arabic", |
|
|
/* Windows. */ |
|
|
"bastion", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *monoClass[] = { |
|
|
"courier", "gothic", /* All platforms. */ |
|
|
"fangsong ti", /* Unix. */ |
|
|
"simplified arabic fixed", /* Windows. */ |
|
|
"monaco", "pryamoy", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *symbolClass[] = { |
|
|
"symbol", "dingbats", "wingdings", NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
static char **fontFallbacks[] = { |
|
|
systemClass, |
|
|
serifClass, |
|
|
sansClass, |
|
|
monoClass, |
|
|
symbolClass, |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Global fallbacks. If the character could not be found in the preferred |
|
|
* fallback list, this list is examined. If the character still cannot be |
|
|
* found, all font families in the system are examined. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static char *globalFontClass[] = { |
|
|
"symbol", /* All platforms. */ |
|
|
/* Unix. */ |
|
|
"lucida sans unicode", /* Windows. */ |
|
|
"bitstream cyberbit", /* Windows popular CJK font */ |
|
|
"chicago", /* Mac. */ |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
#define GetFontAttributes(tkfont) \ |
|
|
((CONST TkFontAttributes *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fa) |
|
|
|
|
|
#define GetFontMetrics(tkfont) \ |
|
|
((CONST TkFontMetrics *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fm) |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
static int ConfigAttributesObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr)); |
|
|
static int CreateNamedFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr)); |
|
|
static void DupFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr, |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)); |
|
|
static int FieldSpecified _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *field)); |
|
|
static void FreeFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); |
|
|
static int GetAttributeInfoObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); |
|
|
static LayoutChunk * NewChunk _ANSI_ARGS_((TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr, |
|
|
int *maxPtr, CONST char *start, int numChars, |
|
|
int curX, int newX, int y)); |
|
|
static int ParseFontNameObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr)); |
|
|
static void RecomputeWidgets _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); |
|
|
static int SetFontFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); |
|
|
static void TheWorldHasChanged _ANSI_ARGS_(( |
|
|
ClientData clientData)); |
|
|
static void UpdateDependentFonts _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFontInfo *fiPtr, |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr)); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The following structure defines the implementation of the "font" Tcl |
|
|
* object, used for drawing. The internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 field of |
|
|
* each font object points to the TkFont structure for the font, or |
|
|
* NULL. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static Tcl_ObjType fontObjType = { |
|
|
"font", /* name */ |
|
|
FreeFontObjProc, /* freeIntRepProc */ |
|
|
DupFontObjProc, /* dupIntRepProc */ |
|
|
NULL, /* updateStringProc */ |
|
|
SetFontFromAny /* setFromAnyProc */ |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontPkgInit -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called when an application is created. It |
|
|
* initializes all the structures that are used by the font |
|
|
* package on a per application basis. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* Stores a token in the mainPtr to hold information needed by this |
|
|
* package on a per application basis. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory allocated. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
void |
|
|
TkFontPkgInit(mainPtr) |
|
|
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* The application being created. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fiPtr = (TkFontInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkFontInfo)); |
|
|
Tcl_InitHashTable(&fiPtr->fontCache, TCL_STRING_KEYS); |
|
|
Tcl_InitHashTable(&fiPtr->namedTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); |
|
|
fiPtr->mainPtr = mainPtr; |
|
|
fiPtr->updatePending = 0; |
|
|
mainPtr->fontInfoPtr = fiPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
TkpFontPkgInit(mainPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontPkgFree -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called when an application is deleted. It |
|
|
* deletes all the structures that were used by the font package |
|
|
* for this application. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory freed. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr) |
|
|
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* The application being deleted. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr, *searchPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashSearch search; |
|
|
int fontsLeft; |
|
|
|
|
|
fiPtr = mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fontsLeft = 0; |
|
|
for (searchPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, &search); |
|
|
searchPtr != NULL; |
|
|
searchPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) { |
|
|
fontsLeft++; |
|
|
fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n", |
|
|
Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->fontCache, searchPtr)); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (fontsLeft) { |
|
|
panic("TkFontPkgFree: all fonts should have been freed already"); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&fiPtr->fontCache); |
|
|
|
|
|
hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search); |
|
|
while (hPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr)); |
|
|
hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&fiPtr->namedTable); |
|
|
if (fiPtr->updatePending != 0) { |
|
|
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TheWorldHasChanged, (ClientData) fiPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
ckfree((char *) fiPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_FontObjCmd -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is implemented to process the "font" Tcl command. |
|
|
* See the user documentation for details on what it does. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* See the user documentation. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv) |
|
|
ClientData clientData; /* Main window associated with interpreter. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
|
|
int objc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]; /* Argument objects. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int index; |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
|
|
static char *optionStrings[] = { |
|
|
"actual", "configure", "create", "delete", |
|
|
"families", "measure", "metrics", "names", |
|
|
NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
enum options { |
|
|
FONT_ACTUAL, FONT_CONFIGURE, FONT_CREATE, FONT_DELETE, |
|
|
FONT_FAMILIES, FONT_MEASURE, FONT_METRICS, FONT_NAMES |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData; |
|
|
fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (objc < 2) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg?"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0, |
|
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
switch ((enum options) index) { |
|
|
case FONT_ACTUAL: { |
|
|
int skip, result; |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; |
|
|
CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin); |
|
|
if (skip < 0) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((objc < 3) || (objc - skip > 4)) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, |
|
|
"font ?-displayof window? ?option?"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]); |
|
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
objc -= skip; |
|
|
objv += skip; |
|
|
faPtr = GetFontAttributes(tkfont); |
|
|
objPtr = NULL; |
|
|
if (objc > 3) { |
|
|
objPtr = objv[3]; |
|
|
} |
|
|
result = GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr); |
|
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
|
|
return result; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_CONFIGURE: { |
|
|
int result; |
|
|
char *string; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (objc < 3) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?options?"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); |
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string); |
|
|
nfPtr = NULL; /* lint. */ |
|
|
if (namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((namedHashPtr == NULL) || (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string, |
|
|
"\" doesn't exist", NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (objc == 3) { |
|
|
objPtr = NULL; |
|
|
} else if (objc == 4) { |
|
|
objPtr = objv[3]; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3, |
|
|
objv + 3, &nfPtr->fa); |
|
|
UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr); |
|
|
return result; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_CREATE: { |
|
|
int skip, i; |
|
|
char *name; |
|
|
char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE]; |
|
|
TkFontAttributes fa; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
skip = 3; |
|
|
if (objc < 3) { |
|
|
name = NULL; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); |
|
|
if (name[0] == '-') { |
|
|
name = NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (name == NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* No font name specified. Generate one of the form "fontX". |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 1; ; i++) { |
|
|
sprintf(buf, "font%d", i); |
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf); |
|
|
if (namedHashPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
name = buf; |
|
|
skip = 2; |
|
|
} |
|
|
TkInitFontAttributes(&fa); |
|
|
if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - skip, objv + skip, |
|
|
&fa) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, &fa) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, NULL); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_DELETE: { |
|
|
int i; |
|
|
char *string; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Delete the named font. If there are still widgets using this |
|
|
* font, then it isn't deleted right away. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (objc < 3) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?fontname ...?"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) { |
|
|
string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]); |
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string); |
|
|
if (namedHashPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string, |
|
|
"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
if (nfPtr->refCount != 0) { |
|
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 1; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
ckfree((char *) nfPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_FAMILIES: { |
|
|
int skip; |
|
|
|
|
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin); |
|
|
if (skip < 0) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (objc - skip != 2) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_MEASURE: { |
|
|
char *string; |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
|
|
int length, skip; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin); |
|
|
if (skip < 0) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (objc - skip != 4) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, |
|
|
"font ?-displayof window? text"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]); |
|
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length); |
|
|
resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); |
|
|
Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length)); |
|
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_METRICS: { |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
|
|
int skip, index, i; |
|
|
CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr; |
|
|
static char *switches[] = { |
|
|
"-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL |
|
|
}; |
|
|
|
|
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin); |
|
|
if (skip < 0) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((objc < 3) || ((objc - skip) > 4)) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, |
|
|
"font ?-displayof window? ?option?"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]); |
|
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
objc -= skip; |
|
|
objv += skip; |
|
|
fmPtr = GetFontMetrics(tkfont); |
|
|
if (objc == 3) { |
|
|
char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4]; |
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf(buf, "-ascent %d -descent %d -linespace %d -fixed %d", |
|
|
fmPtr->ascent, fmPtr->descent, |
|
|
fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent, |
|
|
fmPtr->fixed); |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], switches, |
|
|
"metric", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
i = 0; /* Needed only to prevent compiler |
|
|
* warning. */ |
|
|
switch (index) { |
|
|
case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent; break; |
|
|
case 1: i = fmPtr->descent; break; |
|
|
case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; break; |
|
|
case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed; break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), i); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_NAMES: { |
|
|
char *string; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashSearch search; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (objc != 2) { |
|
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "names"); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); |
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search); |
|
|
while (namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) { |
|
|
string = Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->namedTable, namedHashPtr); |
|
|
strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(string, -1); |
|
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search); |
|
|
} |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* UpdateDependentFonts, TheWorldHasChanged, RecomputeWidgets -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Called when the attributes of a named font changes. Updates all |
|
|
* the instantiated fonts that depend on that named font and then |
|
|
* uses the brute force approach and prepares every widget to |
|
|
* recompute its geometry. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Things get queued for redisplay. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr) |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; /* Info about application's fonts. */ |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* A window in the application. */ |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;/* The named font that is changing. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashSearch search; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
if (nfPtr->refCount == 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Well nobody's using this named font, so don't have to tell |
|
|
* any widgets to recompute themselves. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
cacheHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, &search); |
|
|
while (cacheHashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
for (fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(cacheHashPtr); |
|
|
fontPtr != NULL; fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (fontPtr->namedHashPtr == namedHashPtr) { |
|
|
TkpGetFontFromAttributes(fontPtr, tkwin, &nfPtr->fa); |
|
|
if (fiPtr->updatePending == 0) { |
|
|
fiPtr->updatePending = 1; |
|
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TheWorldHasChanged, (ClientData) fiPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
cacheHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
TheWorldHasChanged(clientData) |
|
|
ClientData clientData; /* Info about application's fonts. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fiPtr = (TkFontInfo *) clientData; |
|
|
fiPtr->updatePending = 0; |
|
|
|
|
|
RecomputeWidgets(fiPtr->mainPtr->winPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
RecomputeWidgets(winPtr) |
|
|
TkWindow *winPtr; /* Window to which command is sent. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
if ((winPtr->classProcsPtr != NULL) |
|
|
&& (winPtr->classProcsPtr->geometryProc != NULL)) { |
|
|
(*winPtr->classProcsPtr->geometryProc)(winPtr->instanceData); |
|
|
} |
|
|
for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
RecomputeWidgets(winPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* CreateNamedFont -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Create the specified named font with the given attributes in the |
|
|
* named font table associated with the interp. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* Returns TCL_OK if the font was successfully created, or TCL_ERROR |
|
|
* if the named font already existed. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an |
|
|
* error message is left in the interp's result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Assume there used to exist a named font by the specified name, and |
|
|
* that the named font had been deleted, but there were still some |
|
|
* widgets using the named font at the time it was deleted. If a |
|
|
* new named font is created with the same name, all those widgets |
|
|
* that were using the old named font will be redisplayed using |
|
|
* the new named font's attributes. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for error return. */ |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* A window associated with interp. */ |
|
|
CONST char *name; /* Name for the new named font. */ |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Attributes for the new named font. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
|
|
int new; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, name, &new); |
|
|
|
|
|
if (new == 0) { |
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) { |
|
|
Tcl_ResetResult(interp); |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", name, |
|
|
"\" already exists", (char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Recreating a named font with the same name as a previous |
|
|
* named font. Some widgets were still using that named |
|
|
* font, so they need to get redisplayed. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
nfPtr->fa = *faPtr; |
|
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 0; |
|
|
UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(NamedFont)); |
|
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 0; |
|
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(namedHashPtr, nfPtr); |
|
|
nfPtr->fa = *faPtr; |
|
|
nfPtr->refCount = 0; |
|
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 0; |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_GetFont -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a string description of a font, map the description to a |
|
|
* corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error |
|
|
* prevented the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an |
|
|
* error message will be left in the interp's result. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The font is added to an internal database with a reference |
|
|
* count. For each call to this procedure, there should eventually |
|
|
* be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the |
|
|
* database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_Font |
|
|
Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, string) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for database and error return. */ |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For display on which font will be used. */ |
|
|
CONST char *string; /* String describing font, as: named font, |
|
|
* native format, or parseable string. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *strPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj((char *) string, -1); |
|
|
Tcl_IncrRefCount(strPtr); |
|
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, strPtr); |
|
|
Tcl_DecrRefCount(strPtr); |
|
|
return tkfont; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_AllocFontFromObj -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a string description of a font, map the description to a |
|
|
* corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error |
|
|
* prevented the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an |
|
|
* error message will be left in interp's result object. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The font is added to an internal database with a reference |
|
|
* count. For each call to this procedure, there should eventually |
|
|
* be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the |
|
|
* database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_Font |
|
|
Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for database and error return. */ |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For screen on which font will be used. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* Object describing font, as: named font, |
|
|
* native format, or parseable string. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr, *namedHashPtr; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr, *firstFontPtr, *oldFontPtr; |
|
|
int new, descent; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
|
|
if (objPtr->typePtr != &fontObjType) { |
|
|
SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
oldFontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (oldFontPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
if (oldFontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's |
|
|
* no longer in use. Clear the reference. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
|
|
oldFontPtr = NULL; |
|
|
} else if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == oldFontPtr->screen) { |
|
|
oldFontPtr->resourceRefCount++; |
|
|
return (Tk_Font) oldFontPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see |
|
|
* if one of them is for the right screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
new = 0; |
|
|
if (oldFontPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
cacheHashPtr = oldFontPtr->cacheHashPtr; |
|
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
cacheHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, |
|
|
Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &new); |
|
|
} |
|
|
firstFontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(cacheHashPtr); |
|
|
for (fontPtr = firstFontPtr; (fontPtr != NULL); |
|
|
fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) { |
|
|
fontPtr->resourceRefCount++; |
|
|
fontPtr->objRefCount++; |
|
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
|
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The desired font isn't in the table. Make a new one. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, |
|
|
Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); |
|
|
if (namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Construct a font based on a named font. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
|
|
nfPtr->refCount++; |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = TkpGetFontFromAttributes(NULL, tkwin, &nfPtr->fa); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Native font? |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = TkpGetNativeFont(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); |
|
|
if (fontPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
TkFontAttributes fa; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr); |
|
|
|
|
|
if (ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, dupObjPtr, &fa) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
if (new) { |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(cacheHashPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DecrRefCount(dupObjPtr); |
|
|
return NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DecrRefCount(dupObjPtr); |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* String contained the attributes inline. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = TkpGetFontFromAttributes(NULL, tkwin, &fa); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr->resourceRefCount = 1; |
|
|
fontPtr->objRefCount = 1; |
|
|
fontPtr->cacheHashPtr = cacheHashPtr; |
|
|
fontPtr->namedHashPtr = namedHashPtr; |
|
|
fontPtr->screen = Tk_Screen(tkwin); |
|
|
fontPtr->nextPtr = firstFontPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(cacheHashPtr, fontPtr); |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars((Tk_Font) fontPtr, "0", 1, -1, 0, &fontPtr->tabWidth); |
|
|
if (fontPtr->tabWidth == 0) { |
|
|
fontPtr->tabWidth = fontPtr->fm.maxWidth; |
|
|
} |
|
|
fontPtr->tabWidth *= 8; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Make sure the tab width isn't zero (some fonts may not have enough |
|
|
* information to set a reasonable tab width). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (fontPtr->tabWidth == 0) { |
|
|
fontPtr->tabWidth = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Get information used for drawing underlines in generic code on a |
|
|
* non-underlined font. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; |
|
|
fontPtr->underlinePos = descent / 2; |
|
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, fontPtr->fa.size) / 10; |
|
|
if (fontPtr->underlineHeight == 0) { |
|
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (fontPtr->underlinePos + fontPtr->underlineHeight > descent) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If this set of values would cause the bottom of the underline |
|
|
* bar to stick below the descent of the font, jack the underline |
|
|
* up a bit higher. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = descent - fontPtr->underlinePos; |
|
|
if (fontPtr->underlineHeight == 0) { |
|
|
fontPtr->underlinePos--; |
|
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
|
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_GetFontFromObj -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Find the font that corresponds to a given object. The font must |
|
|
* have already been created by Tk_GetFont or Tk_AllocFontFromObj. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is a token for the font that matches objPtr |
|
|
* and is suitable for use in tkwin. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* If the object is not already a font ref, the conversion will free |
|
|
* any old internal representation. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_Font |
|
|
Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr) |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* The window that the font will be used in. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The object from which to get the font. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (objPtr->typePtr != &fontObjType) { |
|
|
SetFontFromAny((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
if (fontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's |
|
|
* no longer in use. Clear the reference. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
|
|
fontPtr = NULL; |
|
|
} else if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) { |
|
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see |
|
|
* if one of them is for the right screen. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
hashPtr = fontPtr->cacheHashPtr; |
|
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (hashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
for (fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr); fontPtr != NULL; |
|
|
fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) { |
|
|
fontPtr->objRefCount++; |
|
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
|
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
panic("Tk_GetFontFromObj called with non-existent font!"); |
|
|
return NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* SetFontFromAny -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the |
|
|
* font internal form. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* Always returns TCL_OK. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The object is left with its typePtr pointing to fontObjType. |
|
|
* The TkFont pointer is NULL. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The object to convert. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
Tcl_ObjType *typePtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_GetString(objPtr); |
|
|
typePtr = objPtr->typePtr; |
|
|
if ((typePtr != NULL) && (typePtr->freeIntRepProc != NULL)) { |
|
|
(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
objPtr->typePtr = &fontObjType; |
|
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL; |
|
|
|
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_NameOfFont -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a font, return a textual string identifying it. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the description that was passed to |
|
|
* Tk_GetFont() to create the font. The storage for the returned |
|
|
* string is only guaranteed to persist until the font is deleted. |
|
|
* The caller should not modify this string. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
char * |
|
|
Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font whose name is desired. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
return fontPtr->cacheHashPtr->key.string; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_FreeFont -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Called to release a font allocated by Tk_GetFont(). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The reference count associated with font is decremented, and |
|
|
* only deallocated when no one is using it. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font to be released. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr, *prevPtr; |
|
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
fontPtr->resourceRefCount--; |
|
|
if (fontPtr->resourceRefCount > 0) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (fontPtr->namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This font derived from a named font. Reduce the reference |
|
|
* count on the named font and free it if no-one else is |
|
|
* using it. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(fontPtr->namedHashPtr); |
|
|
nfPtr->refCount--; |
|
|
if ((nfPtr->refCount == 0) && (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(fontPtr->namedHashPtr); |
|
|
ckfree((char *) nfPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
prevPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr); |
|
|
if (prevPtr == fontPtr) { |
|
|
if (fontPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr, fontPtr->nextPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
while (prevPtr->nextPtr != fontPtr) { |
|
|
prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
TkpDeleteFont(fontPtr); |
|
|
if (fontPtr->objRefCount == 0) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) fontPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_FreeFontFromObj -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Called to release a font inside a Tcl_Obj *. Decrements the refCount |
|
|
* of the font and removes it from the hash tables if necessary. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The reference count associated with font is decremented, and |
|
|
* only deallocated when no one is using it. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr) |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* The window this font lives in. Needed |
|
|
* for the screen value. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
Tk_FreeFont(Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* FreeFontObjProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This proc is called to release an object reference to a font. |
|
|
* Called when the object's internal rep is released or when |
|
|
* the cached fontPtr needs to be changed. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The object reference count is decremented. When both it |
|
|
* and the hash ref count go to zero, the font's resources |
|
|
* are released. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The object we are releasing. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
fontPtr->objRefCount--; |
|
|
if ((fontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) && (fontPtr->objRefCount == 0)) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) fontPtr); |
|
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* DupFontObjProc -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* When a cached font object is duplicated, this is called to |
|
|
* update the internal reps. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The font's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep |
|
|
* of the copy is set to point to it. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static void |
|
|
DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr; /* The object we are copying from. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr; /* The object we are copying to. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
|
|
|
|
|
dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr; |
|
|
dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
fontPtr->objRefCount++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_FontId -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a font, return an opaque handle that should be selected |
|
|
* into the XGCValues structure in order to get the constructed |
|
|
* gc to use this font. This procedure would go away if the |
|
|
* XGCValues structure were replaced with a TkGCValues structure. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Font |
|
|
Tk_FontId(tkfont) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font that is going to be selected into GC. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
return fontPtr->fid; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_GetFontMetrics -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Returns overall ascent and descent metrics for the given font. |
|
|
* These values can be used to space multiple lines of text and |
|
|
* to align the baselines of text in different fonts. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* If *heightPtr is non-NULL, it is filled with the overall height |
|
|
* of the font, which is the sum of the ascent and descent. |
|
|
* If *ascentPtr or *descentPtr is non-NULL, they are filled with |
|
|
* the ascent and/or descent information for the font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, fmPtr) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which metrics are calculated. */ |
|
|
Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr; /* Pointer to structure in which font |
|
|
* metrics for tkfont will be stored. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
fmPtr->ascent = fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
|
|
fmPtr->descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; |
|
|
fmPtr->linespace = fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_PostscriptFontName -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a Tk_Font, return the name of the corresponding Postscript |
|
|
* font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the pointsize of the given Tk_Font. |
|
|
* The name of the Postscript font is appended to dsPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* If the font does not exist on the printer, the print job will |
|
|
* fail at print time. Given a "reasonable" Postscript printer, |
|
|
* the following Tk_Font font families should print correctly: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Avant Garde, Arial, Bookman, Courier, Courier New, Geneva, |
|
|
* Helvetica, Monaco, New Century Schoolbook, New York, |
|
|
* Palatino, Symbol, Times, Times New Roman, Zapf Chancery, |
|
|
* and Zapf Dingbats. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Any other Tk_Font font families may not print correctly |
|
|
* because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which text will be printed. */ |
|
|
Tcl_DString *dsPtr; /* Pointer to an initialized Tcl_DString to |
|
|
* which the name of the Postscript font that |
|
|
* corresponds to tkfont will be appended. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
char *family, *weightString, *slantString; |
|
|
char *src, *dest; |
|
|
int upper, len; |
|
|
|
|
|
len = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr); |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Convert the case-insensitive Tk_Font family name to the |
|
|
* case-sensitive Postscript family name. Take out any spaces and |
|
|
* capitalize the first letter of each word. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
family = fontPtr->fa.family; |
|
|
if (strncasecmp(family, "itc ", 4) == 0) { |
|
|
family = family + 4; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((strcasecmp(family, "Arial") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcasecmp(family, "Geneva") == 0)) { |
|
|
family = "Helvetica"; |
|
|
} else if ((strcasecmp(family, "Times New Roman") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcasecmp(family, "New York") == 0)) { |
|
|
family = "Times"; |
|
|
} else if ((strcasecmp(family, "Courier New") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcasecmp(family, "Monaco") == 0)) { |
|
|
family = "Courier"; |
|
|
} else if (strcasecmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0) { |
|
|
family = "AvantGarde"; |
|
|
} else if (strcasecmp(family, "ZapfChancery") == 0) { |
|
|
family = "ZapfChancery"; |
|
|
} else if (strcasecmp(family, "ZapfDingbats") == 0) { |
|
|
family = "ZapfDingbats"; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
Tcl_UniChar ch; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Inline, capitalize the first letter of each word, lowercase the |
|
|
* rest of the letters in each word, and then take out the spaces |
|
|
* between the words. This may make the DString shorter, which is |
|
|
* safe to do. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, -1); |
|
|
|
|
|
src = dest = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
|
|
upper = 1; |
|
|
for (; *src != '\0'; ) { |
|
|
while (isspace(UCHAR(*src))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ |
|
|
src++; |
|
|
upper = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
src += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(src, &ch); |
|
|
if (upper) { |
|
|
ch = Tcl_UniCharToUpper(ch); |
|
|
upper = 0; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch); |
|
|
} |
|
|
dest += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, dest); |
|
|
} |
|
|
*dest = '\0'; |
|
|
Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, dest - Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr)); |
|
|
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (family != Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len) { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, -1); |
|
|
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (strcasecmp(family, "NewCenturySchoolbook") == 0) { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, len); |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "NewCenturySchlbk", -1); |
|
|
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Get the string to use for the weight. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
weightString = NULL; |
|
|
if (fontPtr->fa.weight == TK_FW_NORMAL) { |
|
|
if (strcmp(family, "Bookman") == 0) { |
|
|
weightString = "Light"; |
|
|
} else if (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0) { |
|
|
weightString = "Book"; |
|
|
} else if (strcmp(family, "ZapfChancery") == 0) { |
|
|
weightString = "Medium"; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
if ((strcmp(family, "Bookman") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0)) { |
|
|
weightString = "Demi"; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
weightString = "Bold"; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Get the string to use for the slant. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
slantString = NULL; |
|
|
if (fontPtr->fa.slant == TK_FS_ROMAN) { |
|
|
; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
if ((strcmp(family, "Helvetica") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcmp(family, "Courier") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0)) { |
|
|
slantString = "Oblique"; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
slantString = "Italic"; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* The string "Roman" needs to be added to some fonts that are not bold |
|
|
* and not italic. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((slantString == NULL) && (weightString == NULL)) { |
|
|
if ((strcmp(family, "Times") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcmp(family, "NewCenturySchlbk") == 0) |
|
|
|| (strcmp(family, "Palatino") == 0)) { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-Roman", -1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-", -1); |
|
|
if (weightString != NULL) { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, weightString, -1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (slantString != NULL) { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, slantString, -1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
return fontPtr->fa.size; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_TextWidth -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* A wrapper function for the more complicated interface of |
|
|
* Tk_MeasureChars. Computes how much space the given |
|
|
* simple string needs. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the width (in pixels) of the given string. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which text will be measured. */ |
|
|
CONST char *string; /* String whose width will be computed. */ |
|
|
int numBytes; /* Number of bytes to consider from |
|
|
* string, or < 0 for strlen(). */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int width; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (numBytes < 0) { |
|
|
numBytes = strlen(string); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, numBytes, -1, 0, &width); |
|
|
return width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_UnderlineChars -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure draws an underline for a given range of characters |
|
|
* in a given string. It doesn't draw the characters (which are |
|
|
* assumed to have been displayed previously); it just draws the |
|
|
* underline. This procedure would mainly be used to quickly |
|
|
* underline a few characters without having to construct an |
|
|
* underlined font. To produce properly underlined text, the |
|
|
* appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Information gets displayed in "drawable". |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, |
|
|
lastByte) |
|
|
Display *display; /* Display on which to draw. */ |
|
|
Drawable drawable; /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ |
|
|
GC gc; /* Graphics context for actually drawing |
|
|
* line. */ |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font used in GC; must have been allocated |
|
|
* by Tk_GetFont(). Used for character |
|
|
* dimensions, etc. */ |
|
|
CONST char *string; /* String containing characters to be |
|
|
* underlined or overstruck. */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates at which first character of |
|
|
* string is drawn. */ |
|
|
int firstByte; /* Index of first byte of first character. */ |
|
|
int lastByte; /* Index of first byte after the last |
|
|
* character. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
int startX, endX; |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, firstByte, -1, 0, &startX); |
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, lastByte, -1, 0, &endX); |
|
|
|
|
|
XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + startX, |
|
|
y + fontPtr->underlinePos, (unsigned int) (endX - startX), |
|
|
(unsigned int) fontPtr->underlineHeight); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_ComputeTextLayout -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Computes the amount of screen space needed to display a |
|
|
* multi-line, justified string of text. Records all the |
|
|
* measurements that were done to determine to size and |
|
|
* positioning of the individual lines of text; this information |
|
|
* can be used by the Tk_DrawTextLayout() procedure to |
|
|
* display the text quickly (without remeasuring it). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is useful for simple widgets that want to |
|
|
* display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the |
|
|
* details. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is a Tk_TextLayout token that holds the |
|
|
* measurement information for the given string. The token is |
|
|
* only valid for the given string. If the string is freed, |
|
|
* the token is no longer valid and must also be freed. To free |
|
|
* the token, call Tk_FreeTextLayout(). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* The dimensions of the screen area needed to display the text |
|
|
* are stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory is allocated to hold the measurement information. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tk_TextLayout |
|
|
Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, |
|
|
widthPtr, heightPtr) |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font that will be used to display text. */ |
|
|
CONST char *string; /* String whose dimensions are to be |
|
|
* computed. */ |
|
|
int numChars; /* Number of characters to consider from |
|
|
* string, or < 0 for strlen(). */ |
|
|
int wrapLength; /* Longest permissible line length, in |
|
|
* pixels. <= 0 means no automatic wrapping: |
|
|
* just let lines get as long as needed. */ |
|
|
Tk_Justify justify; /* How to justify lines. */ |
|
|
int flags; /* Flag bits OR-ed together. |
|
|
* TK_IGNORE_TABS means that tab characters |
|
|
* should not be expanded. TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES |
|
|
* means that newline characters should not |
|
|
* cause a line break. */ |
|
|
int *widthPtr; /* Filled with width of string. */ |
|
|
int *heightPtr; /* Filled with height of string. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
CONST char *start, *end, *special; |
|
|
int n, y, bytesThisChunk, maxChunks; |
|
|
int baseline, height, curX, newX, maxWidth; |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_DString lineBuffer; |
|
|
int *lineLengths; |
|
|
int curLine, layoutHeight; |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_DStringInit(&lineBuffer); |
|
|
|
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
if ((fontPtr == NULL) || (string == NULL)) { |
|
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*widthPtr = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (heightPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*heightPtr = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
fmPtr = &fontPtr->fm; |
|
|
|
|
|
height = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (numChars < 0) { |
|
|
numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (wrapLength == 0) { |
|
|
wrapLength = -1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
maxChunks = 1; |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextLayout) |
|
|
+ (maxChunks - 1) * sizeof(LayoutChunk)); |
|
|
layoutPtr->tkfont = tkfont; |
|
|
layoutPtr->string = string; |
|
|
layoutPtr->numChunks = 0; |
|
|
|
|
|
baseline = fmPtr->ascent; |
|
|
maxWidth = 0; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Divide the string up into simple strings and measure each string. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
curX = 0; |
|
|
|
|
|
end = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, numChars); |
|
|
special = string; |
|
|
|
|
|
flags &= TK_IGNORE_TABS | TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES; |
|
|
flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
|
|
for (start = string; start < end; ) { |
|
|
if (start >= special) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find the next special character in the string. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* INTL: Note that it is safe to increment by byte, because we are |
|
|
* looking for 7-bit characters that will appear unchanged in |
|
|
* UTF-8. At some point we may need to support the full Unicode |
|
|
* whitespace set. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
for (special = start; special < end; special++) { |
|
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES)) { |
|
|
if ((*special == '\n') || (*special == '\r')) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_TABS)) { |
|
|
if (*special == '\t') { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Special points at the next special character (or the end of the |
|
|
* string). Process characters between start and special. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
if (start < special) { |
|
|
bytesThisChunk = Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start, |
|
|
wrapLength - curX, flags, &newX); |
|
|
newX += curX; |
|
|
flags &= ~TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
|
|
if (bytesThisChunk > 0) { |
|
|
chunkPtr = NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, |
|
|
bytesThisChunk, curX, newX, baseline); |
|
|
|
|
|
start += bytesThisChunk; |
|
|
curX = newX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((start == special) && (special < end)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Handle the special character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* INTL: Special will be pointing at a 7-bit character so we |
|
|
* can safely treat it as a single byte. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
|
|
if (*special == '\t') { |
|
|
newX = curX + fontPtr->tabWidth; |
|
|
newX -= newX % fontPtr->tabWidth; |
|
|
NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 1, curX, newX, |
|
|
baseline)->numDisplayChars = -1; |
|
|
start++; |
|
|
if ((start < end) && |
|
|
((wrapLength <= 0) || (newX <= wrapLength))) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* More chars can still fit on this line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
curX = newX; |
|
|
flags &= ~TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 1, curX, curX, |
|
|
baseline)->numDisplayChars = -1; |
|
|
start++; |
|
|
goto wrapLine; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* No more characters are going to go on this line, either because |
|
|
* no more characters can fit or there are no more characters left. |
|
|
* Consume all extra spaces at end of line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
while ((start < end) && isspace(UCHAR(*start))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ |
|
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES)) { |
|
|
if ((*start == '\n') || (*start == '\r')) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_TABS)) { |
|
|
if (*start == '\t') { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
start++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
CONST char *end; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Append all the extra spaces on this line to the end of the |
|
|
* last text chunk. This is a little tricky because we are |
|
|
* switching back and forth between characters and bytes. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
end = chunkPtr->start + chunkPtr->numBytes; |
|
|
bytesThisChunk = start - end; |
|
|
if (bytesThisChunk > 0) { |
|
|
bytesThisChunk = Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, bytesThisChunk, |
|
|
-1, 0, &chunkPtr->totalWidth); |
|
|
chunkPtr->numBytes += bytesThisChunk; |
|
|
chunkPtr->numChars += Tcl_NumUtfChars(end, bytesThisChunk); |
|
|
chunkPtr->totalWidth += curX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
wrapLine: |
|
|
flags |= TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Save current line length, then move current position to start of |
|
|
* next line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (curX > maxWidth) { |
|
|
maxWidth = curX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Remember width of this line, so that all chunks on this line |
|
|
* can be centered or right justified, if necessary. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX)); |
|
|
|
|
|
curX = 0; |
|
|
baseline += height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If last line ends with a newline, then we need to make a 0 width |
|
|
* chunk on the next line. Otherwise "Hello" and "Hello\n" are the |
|
|
* same height. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((layoutPtr->numChunks > 0) && ((flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES) == 0)) { |
|
|
if (layoutPtr->chunks[layoutPtr->numChunks - 1].start[0] == '\n') { |
|
|
chunkPtr = NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 0, curX, |
|
|
curX, baseline); |
|
|
chunkPtr->numDisplayChars = -1; |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX)); |
|
|
baseline += height; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr->width = maxWidth; |
|
|
layoutHeight = baseline - fmPtr->ascent; |
|
|
if (layoutPtr->numChunks == 0) { |
|
|
layoutHeight = height; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This fake chunk is used by the other procedures so that they can |
|
|
* pretend that there is a chunk with no chars in it, which makes |
|
|
* the coding simpler. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr->numChunks = 1; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].start = string; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].numBytes = 0; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].numChars = 0; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].numDisplayChars = -1; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].x = 0; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].y = fmPtr->ascent; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].totalWidth = 0; |
|
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].displayWidth = 0; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Using maximum line length, shift all the chunks so that the lines |
|
|
* are all justified correctly. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
curLine = 0; |
|
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
y = chunkPtr->y; |
|
|
lineLengths = (int *) Tcl_DStringValue(&lineBuffer); |
|
|
for (n = 0; n < layoutPtr->numChunks; n++) { |
|
|
int extra; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr->y != y) { |
|
|
curLine++; |
|
|
y = chunkPtr->y; |
|
|
} |
|
|
extra = maxWidth - lineLengths[curLine]; |
|
|
if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER) { |
|
|
chunkPtr->x += extra / 2; |
|
|
} else if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) { |
|
|
chunkPtr->x += extra; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*widthPtr = layoutPtr->width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (heightPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*heightPtr = layoutHeight; |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DStringFree(&lineBuffer); |
|
|
|
|
|
return (Tk_TextLayout) layoutPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_FreeTextLayout -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is called to release the storage associated with |
|
|
* a Tk_TextLayout when it is no longer needed. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Memory is freed. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_FreeTextLayout(textLayout) |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout textLayout; /* The text layout to be released. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) textLayout; |
|
|
if (layoutPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
ckfree((char *) layoutPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_DrawTextLayout -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display a |
|
|
* multi-line, justified string of text. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to |
|
|
* display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle |
|
|
* the details. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Text drawn on the screen. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar) |
|
|
Display *display; /* Display on which to draw. */ |
|
|
Drawable drawable; /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ |
|
|
GC gc; /* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */ |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
|
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in |
|
|
* which to draw (pixels). */ |
|
|
int firstChar; /* The index of the first character to draw |
|
|
* from the given text item. 0 specfies the |
|
|
* beginning. */ |
|
|
int lastChar; /* The index just after the last character |
|
|
* to draw from the given text item. A number |
|
|
* < 0 means to draw all characters. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
int i, numDisplayChars, drawX; |
|
|
CONST char *firstByte; |
|
|
CONST char *lastByte; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
if (layoutPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
return; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (lastChar < 0) { |
|
|
lastChar = 100000000; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
|
|
numDisplayChars = chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; |
|
|
if ((numDisplayChars > 0) && (firstChar < numDisplayChars)) { |
|
|
if (firstChar <= 0) { |
|
|
drawX = 0; |
|
|
firstChar = 0; |
|
|
firstByte = chunkPtr->start; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
firstByte = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, firstChar); |
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars(layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, |
|
|
firstByte - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &drawX); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (lastChar < numDisplayChars) { |
|
|
numDisplayChars = lastChar; |
|
|
} |
|
|
lastByte = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, numDisplayChars); |
|
|
Tk_DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, |
|
|
firstByte, lastByte - firstByte, |
|
|
x + chunkPtr->x + drawX, y + chunkPtr->y); |
|
|
} |
|
|
firstChar -= chunkPtr->numChars; |
|
|
lastChar -= chunkPtr->numChars; |
|
|
if (lastChar <= 0) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_UnderlineTextLayout -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display an |
|
|
* underline below an individual character. This procedure does |
|
|
* not draw the text, just the underline. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to |
|
|
* display single-font, multi-line text with an individual |
|
|
* character underlined and want Tk to handle the details. |
|
|
* To display larger amounts of underlined text, construct |
|
|
* and use an underlined font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* Underline drawn on the screen. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline) |
|
|
Display *display; /* Display on which to draw. */ |
|
|
Drawable drawable; /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ |
|
|
GC gc; /* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */ |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
|
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in |
|
|
* which to draw (pixels). */ |
|
|
int underline; /* Index of the single character to |
|
|
* underline, or -1 for no underline. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
int xx, yy, width, height; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Tk_CharBbox(layout, underline, &xx, &yy, &width, &height) != 0) |
|
|
&& (width != 0)) { |
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
|
|
|
XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + xx, |
|
|
y + yy + fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->underlinePos, |
|
|
(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) fontPtr->underlineHeight); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_PointToChar -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to determine the |
|
|
* character closest to the given point. The point must be |
|
|
* specified with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the |
|
|
* text layout, which is considered to be located at (0, 0). |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Any point whose y-value is less that 0 will be considered closest |
|
|
* to the first character in the text layout; any point whose y-value |
|
|
* is greater than the height of the text layout will be considered |
|
|
* closest to the last character in the text layout. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Any point whose x-value is less than 0 will be considered closest |
|
|
* to the first character on that line; any point whose x-value is |
|
|
* greater than the width of the text layout will be considered |
|
|
* closest to the last character on that line. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is the index of the character that was |
|
|
* closest to the point. Given a text layout with no characters, |
|
|
* the value 0 will always be returned, referring to a hypothetical |
|
|
* zero-width placeholder character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y) |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
|
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates of point to check, with |
|
|
* respect to the upper-left corner of the |
|
|
* text layout. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr, *lastPtr; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
int i, n, dummy, baseline, pos, numChars; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (y < 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Point lies above any line in this layout. Return the index of |
|
|
* the first char. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Find which line contains the point. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
numChars = 0; |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
|
|
baseline = chunkPtr->y; |
|
|
if (y < baseline + fontPtr->fm.descent) { |
|
|
if (x < chunkPtr->x) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Point is to the left of all chunks on this line. Return |
|
|
* the index of the first character on this line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return numChars; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (x >= layoutPtr->width) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If point lies off right side of the text layout, return |
|
|
* the last char in the last chunk on this line. Without |
|
|
* this, it might return the index of the first char that |
|
|
* was located outside of the text layout. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
x = INT_MAX; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Examine all chunks on this line to see which one contains |
|
|
* the specified point. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
while ((i < layoutPtr->numChunks) && (chunkPtr->y == baseline)) { |
|
|
if (x < chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Point falls on one of the characters in this chunk. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This is a special chunk that encapsulates a single |
|
|
* tab or newline char. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return numChars; |
|
|
} |
|
|
n = Tk_MeasureChars((Tk_Font) fontPtr, chunkPtr->start, |
|
|
chunkPtr->numBytes, x - chunkPtr->x, |
|
|
0, &dummy); |
|
|
return numChars + Tcl_NumUtfChars(chunkPtr->start, n); |
|
|
} |
|
|
numChars += chunkPtr->numChars; |
|
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
i++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Point is to the right of all chars in all the chunks on this |
|
|
* line. Return the index just past the last char in the last |
|
|
* chunk on this line. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
pos = numChars; |
|
|
if (i < layoutPtr->numChunks) { |
|
|
pos--; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return pos; |
|
|
} |
|
|
numChars += chunkPtr->numChars; |
|
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr; |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Point lies below any line in this text layout. Return the index |
|
|
* just past the last char. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
return (lastPtr->start + lastPtr->numChars) - layoutPtr->string; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_CharBbox -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to return the |
|
|
* bounding box for the character specified by index. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the |
|
|
* character, and does not include and left- or right-bearing. |
|
|
* Any character that extends partially outside of the |
|
|
* text layout is considered to be truncated at the edge. Any |
|
|
* character which is located completely outside of the text |
|
|
* layout is considered to be zero-width and pegged against |
|
|
* the edge. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* The height of the bounding box is the line height for this font, |
|
|
* extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the |
|
|
* descent. Information about the actual height of the individual |
|
|
* letter is not available. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* A text layout that contains no characters is considered to |
|
|
* contain a single zero-width placeholder character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is 0 if the index did not specify a character |
|
|
* in the text layout, or non-zero otherwise. In that case, |
|
|
* *bbox is filled with the bounding box of the character. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr) |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call to |
|
|
* Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
|
|
int index; /* The index of the character whose bbox is |
|
|
* desired. */ |
|
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in |
|
|
* pixels, of the bounding box for the character |
|
|
* specified by index, if non-NULL. */ |
|
|
int *widthPtr, *heightPtr; |
|
|
/* Filled with the width and height of the |
|
|
* bounding box for the character specified by |
|
|
* index, if non-NULL. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
int i, x, w; |
|
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
CONST char *end; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (index < 0) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
tkfont = layoutPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) { |
|
|
if (index == 0) { |
|
|
x = chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
w = chunkPtr->totalWidth; |
|
|
goto check; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else if (index < chunkPtr->numChars) { |
|
|
end = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, index); |
|
|
if (xPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, chunkPtr->start, |
|
|
end - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &x); |
|
|
x += chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, Tcl_UtfNext(end) - end, |
|
|
-1, 0, &w); |
|
|
} |
|
|
goto check; |
|
|
} |
|
|
index -= chunkPtr->numChars; |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (index == 0) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Special case to get location just past last char in layout. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr--; |
|
|
x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth; |
|
|
w = 0; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Ensure that the bbox lies within the text layout. This forces all |
|
|
* chars that extend off the right edge of the text layout to have |
|
|
* truncated widths, and all chars that are completely off the right |
|
|
* edge of the text layout to peg to the edge and have 0 width. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
check: |
|
|
if (yPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*yPtr = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (heightPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*heightPtr = fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (x > layoutPtr->width) { |
|
|
x = layoutPtr->width; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (xPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
*xPtr = x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
if (x + w > layoutPtr->width) { |
|
|
w = layoutPtr->width - x; |
|
|
} |
|
|
*widthPtr = w; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
return 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_DistanceToTextLayout -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Computes the distance in pixels from the given point to the |
|
|
* given text layout. Non-displaying space characters that occur |
|
|
* at the end of individual lines in the text layout are ignored |
|
|
* for hit detection purposes. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is 0 if the point (x, y) is inside the text |
|
|
* layout. If the point isn't inside the text layout then the |
|
|
* return value is the distance in pixels from the point to the |
|
|
* text item. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y) |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
|
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates of point to check, with |
|
|
* respect to the upper-left corner of the |
|
|
* text layout (in pixels). */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int i, x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff, dist, minDist, ascent, descent; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
ascent = fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
|
|
descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; |
|
|
|
|
|
minDist = 0; |
|
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\n') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Newline characters are not counted when computing distance |
|
|
* (but tab characters would still be considered). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
x1 = chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
y1 = chunkPtr->y - ascent; |
|
|
x2 = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->displayWidth; |
|
|
y2 = chunkPtr->y + descent; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (x < x1) { |
|
|
xDiff = x1 - x; |
|
|
} else if (x >= x2) { |
|
|
xDiff = x - x2 + 1; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
xDiff = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (y < y1) { |
|
|
yDiff = y1 - y; |
|
|
} else if (y >= y2) { |
|
|
yDiff = y - y2 + 1; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
yDiff = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((xDiff == 0) && (yDiff == 0)) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dist = (int) hypot((double) xDiff, (double) yDiff); |
|
|
if ((dist < minDist) || (minDist == 0)) { |
|
|
minDist = dist; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return minDist; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_IntersectTextLayout -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Determines whether a text layout lies entirely inside, |
|
|
* entirely outside, or overlaps a given rectangle. Non-displaying |
|
|
* space characters that occur at the end of individual lines in |
|
|
* the text layout are ignored for intersection calculations. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is -1 if the text layout is entirely outside of |
|
|
* the rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside |
|
|
* of the rectangle. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height) |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
|
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
|
|
int x, y; /* Upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of |
|
|
* rectangular area to compare with text |
|
|
* layout. Coordinates are with respect to |
|
|
* the upper-left hand corner of the text |
|
|
* layout itself. */ |
|
|
int width, height; /* The width and height of the above |
|
|
* rectangular area, in pixels. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int result, i, x1, y1, x2, y2; |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
int left, top, right, bottom; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Scan the chunks one at a time, seeing whether each is entirely in, |
|
|
* entirely out, or overlapping the rectangle. If an overlap is |
|
|
* detected, return immediately; otherwise wait until all chunks have |
|
|
* been processed and see if they were all inside or all outside. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
|
|
|
|
|
left = x; |
|
|
top = y; |
|
|
right = x + width; |
|
|
bottom = y + height; |
|
|
|
|
|
result = 0; |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\n') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Newline characters are not counted when computing area |
|
|
* intersection (but tab characters would still be considered). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
x1 = chunkPtr->x; |
|
|
y1 = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
|
|
x2 = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->displayWidth; |
|
|
y2 = chunkPtr->y + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((right < x1) || (left >= x2) |
|
|
|| (bottom < y1) || (top >= y2)) { |
|
|
if (result == 1) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
result = -1; |
|
|
} else if ((x1 < left) || (x2 >= right) |
|
|
|| (y1 < top) || (y2 >= bottom)) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} else if (result == -1) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
result = 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return result; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Outputs the contents of a text layout in Postscript format. |
|
|
* The set of lines in the text layout will be rendered by the user |
|
|
* supplied Postscript function. The function should be of the form: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* justify x y string function -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Justify is -1, 0, or 1, depending on whether the following string |
|
|
* should be left, center, or right justified, x and y is the |
|
|
* location for the origin of the string, string is the sequence |
|
|
* of characters to be printed, and function is the name of the |
|
|
* caller-provided function; the function should leave nothing |
|
|
* on the stack. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* The meaning of the origin of the string (x and y) depends on |
|
|
* the justification. For left justification, x is where the |
|
|
* left edge of the string should appear. For center justification, |
|
|
* x is where the center of the string should appear. And for right |
|
|
* justification, x is where the right edge of the string should |
|
|
* appear. This behavior is necessary because, for example, right |
|
|
* justified text on the screen is justified with screen metrics. |
|
|
* The same string needs to be justified with printer metrics on |
|
|
* the printer to appear in the correct place with respect to other |
|
|
* similarly justified strings. In all circumstances, y is the |
|
|
* location of the baseline for the string. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The interp's result is modified to hold the Postscript code that |
|
|
* will render the text layout. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
void |
|
|
Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Filled with Postscript code. */ |
|
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* The layout to be rendered. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
#define MAXUSE 128 |
|
|
char buf[MAXUSE+10]; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
int i, j, used, c, baseline; |
|
|
Tcl_UniChar ch; |
|
|
CONST char *p; |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
|
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
|
|
baseline = chunkPtr->y; |
|
|
used = 0; |
|
|
buf[used++] = '('; |
|
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
|
|
if (baseline != chunkPtr->y) { |
|
|
buf[used++] = ')'; |
|
|
buf[used++] = '\n'; |
|
|
buf[used++] = '('; |
|
|
baseline = chunkPtr->y; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars <= 0) { |
|
|
if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\t') { |
|
|
buf[used++] = '\\'; |
|
|
buf[used++] = 't'; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
p = chunkPtr->start; |
|
|
for (j = 0; j < chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; j++) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* INTL: For now we just treat the characters as binary |
|
|
* data and display the lower byte. Eventually this should |
|
|
* be revised to handle international postscript fonts. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
p += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch); |
|
|
c = UCHAR(ch & 0xff); |
|
|
if ((c == '(') || (c == ')') || (c == '\\') || (c < 0x20) |
|
|
|| (c >= UCHAR(0x7f))) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Tricky point: the "03" is necessary in the sprintf |
|
|
* below, so that a full three digits of octal are |
|
|
* always generated. Without the "03", a number |
|
|
* following this sequence could be interpreted by |
|
|
* Postscript as part of this sequence. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
sprintf(buf + used, "\\%03o", c); |
|
|
used += 4; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
buf[used++] = c; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (used >= MAXUSE) { |
|
|
buf[used] = '\0'; |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL); |
|
|
used = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (used >= MAXUSE) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* If there are a whole bunch of returns or tabs in a row, |
|
|
* then buf[] could get filled up. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
buf[used] = '\0'; |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL); |
|
|
used = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
chunkPtr++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
buf[used++] = ')'; |
|
|
buf[used++] = '\n'; |
|
|
buf[used] = '\0'; |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* ConfigAttributesObj -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Process command line options to fill in fields of a properly |
|
|
* initialized font attributes structure. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an |
|
|
* error message will be left in interp's result object. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The fields of the font attributes structure get filled in with |
|
|
* information from argc/argv. If an error occurs while parsing, |
|
|
* the font attributes structure will contain all modifications |
|
|
* specified in the command line options up to the point of the |
|
|
* error. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for error return. */ |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For display on which font will be used. */ |
|
|
int objc; /* Number of elements in argv. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]; /* Command line options. */ |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Font attributes structure whose fields |
|
|
* are to be modified. Structure must already |
|
|
* be properly initialized. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int i, n, index; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr; |
|
|
char *value; |
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) { |
|
|
optionPtr = objv[i]; |
|
|
valuePtr = objv[i + 1]; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, fontOpt, "option", 1, |
|
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if ((i+2 >= objc) && (objc & 1)) { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that |
|
|
* "font create xyz -xyz" will return the error message |
|
|
* that "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value |
|
|
* for "-xyz" is missing. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", |
|
|
Tcl_GetString(optionPtr), "\" option missing", |
|
|
(char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
switch (index) { |
|
|
case FONT_FAMILY: { |
|
|
value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr); |
|
|
faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_SIZE: { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
faPtr->size = n; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_WEIGHT: { |
|
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, weightMap, valuePtr); |
|
|
if (n == TK_FW_UNKNOWN) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
faPtr->weight = n; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_SLANT: { |
|
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, slantMap, valuePtr); |
|
|
if (n == TK_FS_UNKNOWN) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
faPtr->slant = n; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_UNDERLINE: { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
faPtr->underline = n; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
case FONT_OVERSTRIKE: { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
faPtr->overstrike = n; |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* GetAttributeInfoObj -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Return information about the font attributes as a Tcl list. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is TCL_OK if the objPtr was non-NULL and |
|
|
* specified a valid font attribute, TCL_ERROR otherwise. If TCL_OK |
|
|
* is returned, the interp's result object is modified to hold a |
|
|
* description of either the current value of a single option, or a |
|
|
* list of all options and their current values for the given font |
|
|
* attributes. If TCL_ERROR is returned, the interp's result is |
|
|
* set to an error message describing that the objPtr did not refer |
|
|
* to a valid option. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp to hold result. */ |
|
|
CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* The font attributes to inspect. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* If non-NULL, indicates the single |
|
|
* option whose value is to be |
|
|
* returned. Otherwise information is |
|
|
* returned for all options. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int i, index, start, end; |
|
|
char *str; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr, *resultPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); |
|
|
|
|
|
start = 0; |
|
|
end = FONT_NUMFIELDS; |
|
|
if (objPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, fontOpt, "option", TCL_EXACT, |
|
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
start = index; |
|
|
end = index + 1; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
valuePtr = NULL; |
|
|
for (i = start; i < end; i++) { |
|
|
switch (i) { |
|
|
case FONT_FAMILY: |
|
|
str = faPtr->family; |
|
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1)); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
|
|
|
case FONT_SIZE: |
|
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(faPtr->size); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
|
|
|
case FONT_WEIGHT: |
|
|
str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight); |
|
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
|
|
|
case FONT_SLANT: |
|
|
str = TkFindStateString(slantMap, faPtr->slant); |
|
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
|
|
|
case FONT_UNDERLINE: |
|
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->underline); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
|
|
|
case FONT_OVERSTRIKE: |
|
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->overstrike); |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (objPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, valuePtr); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
optionPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(fontOpt[i], -1); |
|
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, optionPtr); |
|
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, valuePtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* ParseFontNameObj -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used |
|
|
* to construct a font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* The string rep of the object can be one of the following forms: |
|
|
* XLFD (see X documentation) |
|
|
* "family [size] [style1 [style2 ...]" |
|
|
* "-option value [-option value ...]" |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is TCL_ERROR if the object was syntactically |
|
|
* invalid. In that case an error message is left in interp's |
|
|
* result object. Otherwise, fills the font attribute buffer with |
|
|
* the values parsed from the string and returns TCL_OK; |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr) |
|
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for error return. Must not be |
|
|
* NULL. */ |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For display on which font is used. */ |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* Parseable font description object. */ |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Filled with attributes parsed from font |
|
|
* name. Any attributes that were not |
|
|
* specified in font name are filled with |
|
|
* default values. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
char *dash; |
|
|
int objc, result, i, n; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj **objv; |
|
|
char *string; |
|
|
|
|
|
TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr); |
|
|
|
|
|
string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr); |
|
|
if (*string == '-') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This may be an XLFD or an "-option value" string. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* If the string begins with "-*" or a "-foundry-family-*" pattern, |
|
|
* then consider it an XLFD. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (string[1] == '*') { |
|
|
goto xlfd; |
|
|
} |
|
|
dash = strchr(string + 1, '-'); |
|
|
if ((dash != NULL) |
|
|
&& (!isspace(UCHAR(dash[-1])))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ |
|
|
goto xlfd; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
return ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (*string == '*') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* This is appears to be an XLFD. Under Unix, all valid XLFDs were |
|
|
* already handled by TkpGetNativeFont. If we are here, either we |
|
|
* have something that initially looks like an XLFD but isn't or we |
|
|
* have encountered an XLFD on Windows or Mac. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
xlfd: |
|
|
result = TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, NULL); |
|
|
if (result == TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Wasn't an XLFD or "-option value" string. Try it as a |
|
|
* "font size style" list. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) |
|
|
|| (objc < 1)) { |
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "font \"", string, "\" doesn't exist", |
|
|
(char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[0])); |
|
|
if (objc > 1) { |
|
|
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[1], &n) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
faPtr->size = n; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
i = 2; |
|
|
if (objc == 3) { |
|
|
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[2], &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
i = 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
for ( ; i < objc; i++) { |
|
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, weightMap, objv[i]); |
|
|
if (n != TK_FW_UNKNOWN) { |
|
|
faPtr->weight = n; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, slantMap, objv[i]); |
|
|
if (n != TK_FS_UNKNOWN) { |
|
|
faPtr->slant = n; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, underlineMap, objv[i]); |
|
|
if (n != 0) { |
|
|
faPtr->underline = n; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, overstrikeMap, objv[i]); |
|
|
if (n != 0) { |
|
|
faPtr->overstrike = n; |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Unknown style. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown font style \"", |
|
|
Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", (char *) NULL); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* NewChunk -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Helper function for Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). Encapsulates a |
|
|
* measured set of characters in a chunk that can be quickly |
|
|
* drawn. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* A pointer to the new chunk in the text layout. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* The text layout is reallocated to hold more chunks as necessary. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Currently, Tk_ComputeTextLayout() stores contiguous ranges of |
|
|
* "normal" characters in a chunk, along with individual tab |
|
|
* and newline chars in their own chunks. All characters in the |
|
|
* text layout are accounted for. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
static LayoutChunk * |
|
|
NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y) |
|
|
TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr; |
|
|
int *maxPtr; |
|
|
CONST char *start; |
|
|
int numBytes; |
|
|
int curX; |
|
|
int newX; |
|
|
int y; |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
|
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
|
|
int maxChunks, numChars; |
|
|
size_t s; |
|
|
|
|
|
layoutPtr = *layoutPtrPtr; |
|
|
maxChunks = *maxPtr; |
|
|
if (layoutPtr->numChunks == maxChunks) { |
|
|
maxChunks *= 2; |
|
|
s = sizeof(TextLayout) + ((maxChunks - 1) * sizeof(LayoutChunk)); |
|
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) ckrealloc((char *) layoutPtr, s); |
|
|
|
|
|
*layoutPtrPtr = layoutPtr; |
|
|
*maxPtr = maxChunks; |
|
|
} |
|
|
numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(start, numBytes); |
|
|
chunkPtr = &layoutPtr->chunks[layoutPtr->numChunks]; |
|
|
chunkPtr->start = start; |
|
|
chunkPtr->numBytes = numBytes; |
|
|
chunkPtr->numChars = numChars; |
|
|
chunkPtr->numDisplayChars = numChars; |
|
|
chunkPtr->x = curX; |
|
|
chunkPtr->y = y; |
|
|
chunkPtr->totalWidth = newX - curX; |
|
|
chunkPtr->displayWidth = newX - curX; |
|
|
layoutPtr->numChunks++; |
|
|
|
|
|
return chunkPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontParseXLFD -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Break up a fully specified XLFD into a set of font attributes. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* Return value is TCL_ERROR if string was not a fully specified XLFD. |
|
|
* Otherwise, fills font attribute buffer with the values parsed |
|
|
* from the XLFD and returns TCL_OK. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr) |
|
|
CONST char *string; /* Parseable font description string. */ |
|
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Filled with attributes parsed from font |
|
|
* name. Any attributes that were not |
|
|
* specified in font name are filled with |
|
|
* default values. */ |
|
|
TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr; /* Filled with X-specific attributes parsed |
|
|
* from font name. Any attributes that were |
|
|
* not specified in font name are filled with |
|
|
* default values. May be NULL if such |
|
|
* information is not desired. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
char *src; |
|
|
CONST char *str; |
|
|
int i, j; |
|
|
char *field[XLFD_NUMFIELDS + 2]; |
|
|
Tcl_DString ds; |
|
|
TkXLFDAttributes xa; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (xaPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
xaPtr = &xa; |
|
|
} |
|
|
TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr); |
|
|
TkInitXLFDAttributes(xaPtr); |
|
|
|
|
|
memset(field, '\0', sizeof(field)); |
|
|
|
|
|
str = string; |
|
|
if (*str == '-') { |
|
|
str++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_DStringInit(&ds); |
|
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, (char *) str, -1); |
|
|
src = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); |
|
|
|
|
|
field[0] = src; |
|
|
for (i = 0; *src != '\0'; src++) { |
|
|
if (!(*src & 0x80) |
|
|
&& Tcl_UniCharIsUpper(UCHAR(*src))) { |
|
|
*src = (char) Tcl_UniCharToLower(UCHAR(*src)); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (*src == '-') { |
|
|
i++; |
|
|
if (i == XLFD_NUMFIELDS) { |
|
|
continue; |
|
|
} |
|
|
*src = '\0'; |
|
|
field[i] = src + 1; |
|
|
if (i > XLFD_NUMFIELDS) { |
|
|
break; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* An XLFD of the form -adobe-times-medium-r-*-12-*-* is pretty common, |
|
|
* but it is (strictly) malformed, because the first * is eliding both |
|
|
* the Setwidth and the Addstyle fields. If the Addstyle field is a |
|
|
* number, then assume the above incorrect form was used and shift all |
|
|
* the rest of the fields right by one, so the number gets interpreted |
|
|
* as a pixelsize. This fix is so that we don't get a million reports |
|
|
* that "it works under X (as a native font name), but gives a syntax |
|
|
* error under Windows (as a parsed set of attributes)". |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if ((i > XLFD_ADD_STYLE) && (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE]))) { |
|
|
if (atoi(field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE]) != 0) { |
|
|
for (j = XLFD_NUMFIELDS - 1; j >= XLFD_ADD_STYLE; j--) { |
|
|
field[j + 1] = field[j]; |
|
|
} |
|
|
field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE] = NULL; |
|
|
i++; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Bail if we don't have enough of the fields (up to pointsize). |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (i < XLFD_FAMILY) { |
|
|
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds); |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_FOUNDRY])) { |
|
|
xaPtr->foundry = Tk_GetUid(field[XLFD_FOUNDRY]); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_FAMILY])) { |
|
|
faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(field[XLFD_FAMILY]); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_WEIGHT])) { |
|
|
faPtr->weight = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, xlfdWeightMap, |
|
|
field[XLFD_WEIGHT]); |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_SLANT])) { |
|
|
xaPtr->slant = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, xlfdSlantMap, |
|
|
field[XLFD_SLANT]); |
|
|
if (xaPtr->slant == TK_FS_ROMAN) { |
|
|
faPtr->slant = TK_FS_ROMAN; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
faPtr->slant = TK_FS_ITALIC; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_SETWIDTH])) { |
|
|
xaPtr->setwidth = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, xlfdSetwidthMap, |
|
|
field[XLFD_SETWIDTH]); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* XLFD_ADD_STYLE ignored. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel |
|
|
* for historical compatibility. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
faPtr->size = 12; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE])) { |
|
|
if (field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE][0] == '[') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Some X fonts have the point size specified as follows: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ] |
|
|
* |
|
|
* where N1 is the point size (in points, not decipoints!), and |
|
|
* N2, N3, and N4 are some additional numbers that I don't know |
|
|
* the purpose of, so I ignore them. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
faPtr->size = atoi(field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE] + 1); |
|
|
} else if (Tcl_GetInt(NULL, field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE], |
|
|
&faPtr->size) == TCL_OK) { |
|
|
faPtr->size /= 10; |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Pixel height of font. If specified, overrides pointsize. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE])) { |
|
|
if (field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE][0] == '[') { |
|
|
/* |
|
|
* Some X fonts have the pixel size specified as follows: |
|
|
* |
|
|
* [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ] |
|
|
* |
|
|
* where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 |
|
|
* are some additional numbers that I don't know |
|
|
* the purpose of, so I ignore them. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
faPtr->size = atoi(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE] + 1); |
|
|
} else if (Tcl_GetInt(NULL, field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE], |
|
|
&faPtr->size) != TCL_OK) { |
|
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
faPtr->size = -faPtr->size; |
|
|
|
|
|
/* XLFD_RESOLUTION_X ignored. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* XLFD_RESOLUTION_Y ignored. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* XLFD_SPACING ignored. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* XLFD_AVERAGE_WIDTH ignored. */ |
|
|
|
|
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_CHARSET])) { |
|
|
xaPtr->charset = Tk_GetUid(field[XLFD_CHARSET]); |
|
|
} else { |
|
|
xaPtr->charset = Tk_GetUid("iso8859-1"); |
|
|
} |
|
|
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds); |
|
|
return TCL_OK; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* FieldSpecified -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Helper function for TkParseXLFD(). Determines if a field in the |
|
|
* XLFD was set to a non-null, non-don't-care value. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is 0 if the field in the XLFD was not set and |
|
|
* should be ignored, non-zero otherwise. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
static int |
|
|
FieldSpecified(field) |
|
|
CONST char *field; /* The field of the XLFD to check. Strictly |
|
|
* speaking, only when the string is "*" does it mean |
|
|
* don't-care. However, an unspecified or question |
|
|
* mark is also interpreted as don't-care. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
char ch; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (field == NULL) { |
|
|
return 0; |
|
|
} |
|
|
ch = field[0]; |
|
|
return (ch != '*' && ch != '?'); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontGetPixels -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a font size specification (as described in the TkFontAttributes |
|
|
* structure) return the number of pixels it represents. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, size) |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For point->pixel conversion factor. */ |
|
|
int size; /* Font size. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
double d; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (size < 0) { |
|
|
return -size; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
d = size * 25.4 / 72.0; |
|
|
d *= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
|
|
d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
|
|
return (int) (d + 0.5); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontGetPoints -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a font size specification (as described in the TkFontAttributes |
|
|
* structure) return the number of points it represents. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
int |
|
|
TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, size) |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For pixel->point conversion factor. */ |
|
|
int size; /* Font size. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
double d; |
|
|
|
|
|
if (size >= 0) { |
|
|
return size; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
d = -size * 72.0 / 25.4; |
|
|
d *= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
|
|
d /= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
|
|
return (int) (d + 0.5); |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontGetAliasList -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Given a font name, find the list of all aliases for that font |
|
|
* name. One of the names in this list will probably be the name |
|
|
* that this platform expects when asking for the font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. The return value is NULL if the font name has no |
|
|
* aliases. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
char ** |
|
|
TkFontGetAliasList(faceName) |
|
|
CONST char *faceName; /* Font name to test for aliases. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
int i, j; |
|
|
|
|
|
for (i = 0; fontAliases[i] != NULL; i++) { |
|
|
for (j = 0; fontAliases[i][j] != NULL; j++) { |
|
|
if (strcasecmp(faceName, fontAliases[i][j]) == 0) { |
|
|
return fontAliases[i]; |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return NULL; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontGetFallbacks -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Get the list of font fallbacks that the platform-specific code |
|
|
* can use to try to find the closest matching font the name |
|
|
* requested. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
char *** |
|
|
TkFontGetFallbacks() |
|
|
{ |
|
|
return fontFallbacks; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontGetGlobalClass -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Get the list of fonts to try if the requested font name does not |
|
|
* exist and no fallbacks for that font name could be used either. |
|
|
* The names in this list are considered preferred over all the other |
|
|
* font names in the system when looking for a last-ditch fallback. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
char ** |
|
|
TkFontGetGlobalClass() |
|
|
{ |
|
|
return globalFontClass; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkFontGetSymbolClass -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Get the list of fonts that are symbolic; used if the operating |
|
|
* system cannot apriori identify symbolic fonts on its own. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* As above. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
char ** |
|
|
TkFontGetSymbolClass() |
|
|
{ |
|
|
return symbolClass; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
/* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* TkDebugFont -- |
|
|
* |
|
|
* This procedure returns debugging information about a font. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Results: |
|
|
* The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkFont |
|
|
* corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that |
|
|
* contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the |
|
|
* TkFont structure. |
|
|
* |
|
|
* Side effects: |
|
|
* None. |
|
|
* |
|
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
Tcl_Obj * |
|
|
TkDebugFont(tkwin, name) |
|
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* The window in which the font will be |
|
|
* used (not currently used). */ |
|
|
char *name; /* Name of the desired color. */ |
|
|
{ |
|
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; |
|
|
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr, *objPtr; |
|
|
|
|
|
resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); |
|
|
hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry( |
|
|
&((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr->fontCache, name); |
|
|
if (hashPtr != NULL) { |
|
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr); |
|
|
if (fontPtr == NULL) { |
|
|
panic("TkDebugFont found empty hash table entry"); |
|
|
} |
|
|
for ( ; (fontPtr != NULL); fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
|
|
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); |
|
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
|
|
Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->resourceRefCount)); |
|
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
|
|
Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount)); |
|
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr); |
|
|
} |
|
|
} |
|
|
return resultPtr; |
|
|
} |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
/* $History: tkFont.c $ |
|
|
* |
|
|
* ***************** Version 1 ***************** |
|
|
* User: Dtashley Date: 1/02/01 Time: 2:48a |
|
|
* Created in $/IjuScripter, IjuConsole/Source/Tk Base |
|
|
* Initial check-in. |
|
|
*/ |
|
|
|
|
|
/* End of TKFONT.C */ |
|
| 1 |
|
/* $Header$ */ |
| 2 |
|
|
| 3 |
|
/* |
| 4 |
|
* tkFont.c -- |
| 5 |
|
* |
| 6 |
|
* This file maintains a database of fonts for the Tk toolkit. |
| 7 |
|
* It also provides several utility procedures for measuring and |
| 8 |
|
* displaying text. |
| 9 |
|
* |
| 10 |
|
* Copyright (c) 1990-1994 The Regents of the University of California. |
| 11 |
|
* Copyright (c) 1994-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc. |
| 12 |
|
* |
| 13 |
|
* See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution |
| 14 |
|
* of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES. |
| 15 |
|
* |
| 16 |
|
* RCS: @(#) $Id: tkfont.c,v 1.1.1.1 2001/06/13 05:00:58 dtashley Exp $ |
| 17 |
|
*/ |
| 18 |
|
|
| 19 |
|
#include "tkPort.h" |
| 20 |
|
#include "tkInt.h" |
| 21 |
|
#include "tkFont.h" |
| 22 |
|
|
| 23 |
|
/* |
| 24 |
|
* The following structure is used to keep track of all the fonts that |
| 25 |
|
* exist in the current application. It must be stored in the |
| 26 |
|
* TkMainInfo for the application. |
| 27 |
|
*/ |
| 28 |
|
|
| 29 |
|
typedef struct TkFontInfo { |
| 30 |
|
Tcl_HashTable fontCache; /* Map a string to an existing Tk_Font. |
| 31 |
|
* Keys are string font names, values are |
| 32 |
|
* TkFont pointers. */ |
| 33 |
|
Tcl_HashTable namedTable; /* Map a name to a set of attributes for a |
| 34 |
|
* font, used when constructing a Tk_Font from |
| 35 |
|
* a named font description. Keys are |
| 36 |
|
* strings, values are NamedFont pointers. */ |
| 37 |
|
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* Application that owns this structure. */ |
| 38 |
|
int updatePending; /* Non-zero when a World Changed event has |
| 39 |
|
* already been queued to handle a change to |
| 40 |
|
* a named font. */ |
| 41 |
|
} TkFontInfo; |
| 42 |
|
|
| 43 |
|
/* |
| 44 |
|
* The following data structure is used to keep track of the font attributes |
| 45 |
|
* for each named font that has been defined. The named font is only deleted |
| 46 |
|
* when the last reference to it goes away. |
| 47 |
|
*/ |
| 48 |
|
|
| 49 |
|
typedef struct NamedFont { |
| 50 |
|
int refCount; /* Number of users of named font. */ |
| 51 |
|
int deletePending; /* Non-zero if font should be deleted when |
| 52 |
|
* last reference goes away. */ |
| 53 |
|
TkFontAttributes fa; /* Desired attributes for named font. */ |
| 54 |
|
} NamedFont; |
| 55 |
|
|
| 56 |
|
/* |
| 57 |
|
* The following two structures are used to keep track of string |
| 58 |
|
* measurement information when using the text layout facilities. |
| 59 |
|
* |
| 60 |
|
* A LayoutChunk represents a contiguous range of text that can be measured |
| 61 |
|
* and displayed by low-level text calls. In general, chunks will be |
| 62 |
|
* delimited by newlines and tabs. Low-level, platform-specific things |
| 63 |
|
* like kerning and non-integer character widths may occur between the |
| 64 |
|
* characters in a single chunk, but not between characters in different |
| 65 |
|
* chunks. |
| 66 |
|
* |
| 67 |
|
* A TextLayout is a collection of LayoutChunks. It can be displayed with |
| 68 |
|
* respect to any origin. It is the implementation of the Tk_TextLayout |
| 69 |
|
* opaque token. |
| 70 |
|
*/ |
| 71 |
|
|
| 72 |
|
typedef struct LayoutChunk { |
| 73 |
|
CONST char *start; /* Pointer to simple string to be displayed. |
| 74 |
|
* This is a pointer into the TkTextLayout's |
| 75 |
|
* string. */ |
| 76 |
|
int numBytes; /* The number of bytes in this chunk. */ |
| 77 |
|
int numChars; /* The number of characters in this chunk. */ |
| 78 |
|
int numDisplayChars; /* The number of characters to display when |
| 79 |
|
* this chunk is displayed. Can be less than |
| 80 |
|
* numChars if extra space characters were |
| 81 |
|
* absorbed by the end of the chunk. This |
| 82 |
|
* will be < 0 if this is a chunk that is |
| 83 |
|
* holding a tab or newline. */ |
| 84 |
|
int x, y; /* The origin of the first character in this |
| 85 |
|
* chunk with respect to the upper-left hand |
| 86 |
|
* corner of the TextLayout. */ |
| 87 |
|
int totalWidth; /* Width in pixels of this chunk. Used |
| 88 |
|
* when hit testing the invisible spaces at |
| 89 |
|
* the end of a chunk. */ |
| 90 |
|
int displayWidth; /* Width in pixels of the displayable |
| 91 |
|
* characters in this chunk. Can be less than |
| 92 |
|
* width if extra space characters were |
| 93 |
|
* absorbed by the end of the chunk. */ |
| 94 |
|
} LayoutChunk; |
| 95 |
|
|
| 96 |
|
typedef struct TextLayout { |
| 97 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* The font used when laying out the text. */ |
| 98 |
|
CONST char *string; /* The string that was layed out. */ |
| 99 |
|
int width; /* The maximum width of all lines in the |
| 100 |
|
* text layout. */ |
| 101 |
|
int numChunks; /* Number of chunks actually used in |
| 102 |
|
* following array. */ |
| 103 |
|
LayoutChunk chunks[1]; /* Array of chunks. The actual size will |
| 104 |
|
* be maxChunks. THIS FIELD MUST BE THE LAST |
| 105 |
|
* IN THE STRUCTURE. */ |
| 106 |
|
} TextLayout; |
| 107 |
|
|
| 108 |
|
/* |
| 109 |
|
* The following structures are used as two-way maps between the values for |
| 110 |
|
* the fields in the TkFontAttributes structure and the strings used in |
| 111 |
|
* Tcl, when parsing both option-value format and style-list format font |
| 112 |
|
* name strings. |
| 113 |
|
*/ |
| 114 |
|
|
| 115 |
|
static TkStateMap weightMap[] = { |
| 116 |
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "normal"}, |
| 117 |
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "bold"}, |
| 118 |
|
{TK_FW_UNKNOWN, NULL} |
| 119 |
|
}; |
| 120 |
|
|
| 121 |
|
static TkStateMap slantMap[] = { |
| 122 |
|
{TK_FS_ROMAN, "roman"}, |
| 123 |
|
{TK_FS_ITALIC, "italic"}, |
| 124 |
|
{TK_FS_UNKNOWN, NULL} |
| 125 |
|
}; |
| 126 |
|
|
| 127 |
|
static TkStateMap underlineMap[] = { |
| 128 |
|
{1, "underline"}, |
| 129 |
|
{0, NULL} |
| 130 |
|
}; |
| 131 |
|
|
| 132 |
|
static TkStateMap overstrikeMap[] = { |
| 133 |
|
{1, "overstrike"}, |
| 134 |
|
{0, NULL} |
| 135 |
|
}; |
| 136 |
|
|
| 137 |
|
/* |
| 138 |
|
* The following structures are used when parsing XLFD's into a set of |
| 139 |
|
* TkFontAttributes. |
| 140 |
|
*/ |
| 141 |
|
|
| 142 |
|
static TkStateMap xlfdWeightMap[] = { |
| 143 |
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "normal"}, |
| 144 |
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "medium"}, |
| 145 |
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "book"}, |
| 146 |
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, "light"}, |
| 147 |
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "bold"}, |
| 148 |
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "demi"}, |
| 149 |
|
{TK_FW_BOLD, "demibold"}, |
| 150 |
|
{TK_FW_NORMAL, NULL} /* Assume anything else is "normal". */ |
| 151 |
|
}; |
| 152 |
|
|
| 153 |
|
static TkStateMap xlfdSlantMap[] = { |
| 154 |
|
{TK_FS_ROMAN, "r"}, |
| 155 |
|
{TK_FS_ITALIC, "i"}, |
| 156 |
|
{TK_FS_OBLIQUE, "o"}, |
| 157 |
|
{TK_FS_ROMAN, NULL} /* Assume anything else is "roman". */ |
| 158 |
|
}; |
| 159 |
|
|
| 160 |
|
static TkStateMap xlfdSetwidthMap[] = { |
| 161 |
|
{TK_SW_NORMAL, "normal"}, |
| 162 |
|
{TK_SW_CONDENSE, "narrow"}, |
| 163 |
|
{TK_SW_CONDENSE, "semicondensed"}, |
| 164 |
|
{TK_SW_CONDENSE, "condensed"}, |
| 165 |
|
{TK_SW_UNKNOWN, NULL} |
| 166 |
|
}; |
| 167 |
|
|
| 168 |
|
/* |
| 169 |
|
* The following structure and defines specify the valid builtin options |
| 170 |
|
* when configuring a set of font attributes. |
| 171 |
|
*/ |
| 172 |
|
|
| 173 |
|
static char *fontOpt[] = { |
| 174 |
|
"-family", |
| 175 |
|
"-size", |
| 176 |
|
"-weight", |
| 177 |
|
"-slant", |
| 178 |
|
"-underline", |
| 179 |
|
"-overstrike", |
| 180 |
|
NULL |
| 181 |
|
}; |
| 182 |
|
|
| 183 |
|
#define FONT_FAMILY 0 |
| 184 |
|
#define FONT_SIZE 1 |
| 185 |
|
#define FONT_WEIGHT 2 |
| 186 |
|
#define FONT_SLANT 3 |
| 187 |
|
#define FONT_UNDERLINE 4 |
| 188 |
|
#define FONT_OVERSTRIKE 5 |
| 189 |
|
#define FONT_NUMFIELDS 6 |
| 190 |
|
|
| 191 |
|
/* |
| 192 |
|
* Hardcoded font aliases. These are used to describe (mostly) identical |
| 193 |
|
* fonts whose names differ from platform to platform. If the |
| 194 |
|
* user-supplied font name matches any of the names in one of the alias |
| 195 |
|
* lists, the other names in the alias list are also automatically tried. |
| 196 |
|
*/ |
| 197 |
|
|
| 198 |
|
static char *timesAliases[] = { |
| 199 |
|
"Times", /* Unix. */ |
| 200 |
|
"Times New Roman", /* Windows. */ |
| 201 |
|
"New York", /* Mac. */ |
| 202 |
|
NULL |
| 203 |
|
}; |
| 204 |
|
|
| 205 |
|
static char *helveticaAliases[] = { |
| 206 |
|
"Helvetica", /* Unix. */ |
| 207 |
|
"Arial", /* Windows. */ |
| 208 |
|
"Geneva", /* Mac. */ |
| 209 |
|
NULL |
| 210 |
|
}; |
| 211 |
|
|
| 212 |
|
static char *courierAliases[] = { |
| 213 |
|
"Courier", /* Unix and Mac. */ |
| 214 |
|
"Courier New", /* Windows. */ |
| 215 |
|
NULL |
| 216 |
|
}; |
| 217 |
|
|
| 218 |
|
static char *minchoAliases[] = { |
| 219 |
|
"mincho", /* Unix. */ |
| 220 |
|
"\357\274\255\357\274\263 \346\230\216\346\234\235", |
| 221 |
|
/* Windows (MS mincho). */ |
| 222 |
|
"\346\234\254\346\230\216\346\234\235\342\210\222\357\274\255", |
| 223 |
|
/* Mac (honmincho-M). */ |
| 224 |
|
NULL |
| 225 |
|
}; |
| 226 |
|
|
| 227 |
|
static char *gothicAliases[] = { |
| 228 |
|
"gothic", /* Unix. */ |
| 229 |
|
"\357\274\255\357\274\263 \343\202\264\343\202\267\343\203\203\343\202\257", |
| 230 |
|
/* Windows (MS goshikku). */ |
| 231 |
|
"\344\270\270\343\202\264\343\202\267\343\203\203\343\202\257\342\210\222\357\274\255", |
| 232 |
|
/* Mac (goshikku-M). */ |
| 233 |
|
NULL |
| 234 |
|
}; |
| 235 |
|
|
| 236 |
|
static char *dingbatsAliases[] = { |
| 237 |
|
"dingbats", "zapfdingbats", "itc zapfdingbats", |
| 238 |
|
/* Unix. */ |
| 239 |
|
/* Windows. */ |
| 240 |
|
"zapf dingbats", /* Mac. */ |
| 241 |
|
NULL |
| 242 |
|
}; |
| 243 |
|
|
| 244 |
|
static char **fontAliases[] = { |
| 245 |
|
timesAliases, |
| 246 |
|
helveticaAliases, |
| 247 |
|
courierAliases, |
| 248 |
|
minchoAliases, |
| 249 |
|
gothicAliases, |
| 250 |
|
dingbatsAliases, |
| 251 |
|
NULL |
| 252 |
|
}; |
| 253 |
|
|
| 254 |
|
/* |
| 255 |
|
* Hardcoded font classes. If the character cannot be found in the base |
| 256 |
|
* font, the classes are examined in order to see if some other similar |
| 257 |
|
* font should be examined also. |
| 258 |
|
*/ |
| 259 |
|
|
| 260 |
|
static char *systemClass[] = { |
| 261 |
|
"fixed", /* Unix. */ |
| 262 |
|
/* Windows. */ |
| 263 |
|
"chicago", "osaka", "sistemny", /* Mac. */ |
| 264 |
|
NULL |
| 265 |
|
}; |
| 266 |
|
|
| 267 |
|
static char *serifClass[] = { |
| 268 |
|
"times", "palatino", "mincho", /* All platforms. */ |
| 269 |
|
"song ti", /* Unix. */ |
| 270 |
|
"ms serif", "simplified arabic", /* Windows. */ |
| 271 |
|
"latinski", /* Mac. */ |
| 272 |
|
NULL |
| 273 |
|
}; |
| 274 |
|
|
| 275 |
|
static char *sansClass[] = { |
| 276 |
|
"helvetica", "gothic", /* All platforms. */ |
| 277 |
|
/* Unix. */ |
| 278 |
|
"ms sans serif", "traditional arabic", |
| 279 |
|
/* Windows. */ |
| 280 |
|
"bastion", /* Mac. */ |
| 281 |
|
NULL |
| 282 |
|
}; |
| 283 |
|
|
| 284 |
|
static char *monoClass[] = { |
| 285 |
|
"courier", "gothic", /* All platforms. */ |
| 286 |
|
"fangsong ti", /* Unix. */ |
| 287 |
|
"simplified arabic fixed", /* Windows. */ |
| 288 |
|
"monaco", "pryamoy", /* Mac. */ |
| 289 |
|
NULL |
| 290 |
|
}; |
| 291 |
|
|
| 292 |
|
static char *symbolClass[] = { |
| 293 |
|
"symbol", "dingbats", "wingdings", NULL |
| 294 |
|
}; |
| 295 |
|
|
| 296 |
|
static char **fontFallbacks[] = { |
| 297 |
|
systemClass, |
| 298 |
|
serifClass, |
| 299 |
|
sansClass, |
| 300 |
|
monoClass, |
| 301 |
|
symbolClass, |
| 302 |
|
NULL |
| 303 |
|
}; |
| 304 |
|
|
| 305 |
|
/* |
| 306 |
|
* Global fallbacks. If the character could not be found in the preferred |
| 307 |
|
* fallback list, this list is examined. If the character still cannot be |
| 308 |
|
* found, all font families in the system are examined. |
| 309 |
|
*/ |
| 310 |
|
|
| 311 |
|
static char *globalFontClass[] = { |
| 312 |
|
"symbol", /* All platforms. */ |
| 313 |
|
/* Unix. */ |
| 314 |
|
"lucida sans unicode", /* Windows. */ |
| 315 |
|
"bitstream cyberbit", /* Windows popular CJK font */ |
| 316 |
|
"chicago", /* Mac. */ |
| 317 |
|
NULL |
| 318 |
|
}; |
| 319 |
|
|
| 320 |
|
#define GetFontAttributes(tkfont) \ |
| 321 |
|
((CONST TkFontAttributes *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fa) |
| 322 |
|
|
| 323 |
|
#define GetFontMetrics(tkfont) \ |
| 324 |
|
((CONST TkFontMetrics *) &((TkFont *) (tkfont))->fm) |
| 325 |
|
|
| 326 |
|
|
| 327 |
|
static int ConfigAttributesObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 328 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin, int objc, Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[], |
| 329 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr)); |
| 330 |
|
static int CreateNamedFont _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 331 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin, CONST char *name, |
| 332 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr)); |
| 333 |
|
static void DupFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr, |
| 334 |
|
Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr)); |
| 335 |
|
static int FieldSpecified _ANSI_ARGS_((CONST char *field)); |
| 336 |
|
static void FreeFontObjProc _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); |
| 337 |
|
static int GetAttributeInfoObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 338 |
|
CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); |
| 339 |
|
static LayoutChunk * NewChunk _ANSI_ARGS_((TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr, |
| 340 |
|
int *maxPtr, CONST char *start, int numChars, |
| 341 |
|
int curX, int newX, int y)); |
| 342 |
|
static int ParseFontNameObj _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 343 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_Obj *objPtr, |
| 344 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr)); |
| 345 |
|
static void RecomputeWidgets _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr)); |
| 346 |
|
static int SetFontFromAny _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp, |
| 347 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr)); |
| 348 |
|
static void TheWorldHasChanged _ANSI_ARGS_(( |
| 349 |
|
ClientData clientData)); |
| 350 |
|
static void UpdateDependentFonts _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFontInfo *fiPtr, |
| 351 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin, Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr)); |
| 352 |
|
|
| 353 |
|
/* |
| 354 |
|
* The following structure defines the implementation of the "font" Tcl |
| 355 |
|
* object, used for drawing. The internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 field of |
| 356 |
|
* each font object points to the TkFont structure for the font, or |
| 357 |
|
* NULL. |
| 358 |
|
*/ |
| 359 |
|
|
| 360 |
|
static Tcl_ObjType fontObjType = { |
| 361 |
|
"font", /* name */ |
| 362 |
|
FreeFontObjProc, /* freeIntRepProc */ |
| 363 |
|
DupFontObjProc, /* dupIntRepProc */ |
| 364 |
|
NULL, /* updateStringProc */ |
| 365 |
|
SetFontFromAny /* setFromAnyProc */ |
| 366 |
|
}; |
| 367 |
|
|
| 368 |
|
|
| 369 |
|
/* |
| 370 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 371 |
|
* |
| 372 |
|
* TkFontPkgInit -- |
| 373 |
|
* |
| 374 |
|
* This procedure is called when an application is created. It |
| 375 |
|
* initializes all the structures that are used by the font |
| 376 |
|
* package on a per application basis. |
| 377 |
|
* |
| 378 |
|
* Results: |
| 379 |
|
* Stores a token in the mainPtr to hold information needed by this |
| 380 |
|
* package on a per application basis. |
| 381 |
|
* |
| 382 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 383 |
|
* Memory allocated. |
| 384 |
|
* |
| 385 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 386 |
|
*/ |
| 387 |
|
void |
| 388 |
|
TkFontPkgInit(mainPtr) |
| 389 |
|
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* The application being created. */ |
| 390 |
|
{ |
| 391 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
| 392 |
|
|
| 393 |
|
fiPtr = (TkFontInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkFontInfo)); |
| 394 |
|
Tcl_InitHashTable(&fiPtr->fontCache, TCL_STRING_KEYS); |
| 395 |
|
Tcl_InitHashTable(&fiPtr->namedTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS); |
| 396 |
|
fiPtr->mainPtr = mainPtr; |
| 397 |
|
fiPtr->updatePending = 0; |
| 398 |
|
mainPtr->fontInfoPtr = fiPtr; |
| 399 |
|
|
| 400 |
|
TkpFontPkgInit(mainPtr); |
| 401 |
|
} |
| 402 |
|
|
| 403 |
|
/* |
| 404 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 405 |
|
* |
| 406 |
|
* TkFontPkgFree -- |
| 407 |
|
* |
| 408 |
|
* This procedure is called when an application is deleted. It |
| 409 |
|
* deletes all the structures that were used by the font package |
| 410 |
|
* for this application. |
| 411 |
|
* |
| 412 |
|
* Results: |
| 413 |
|
* None. |
| 414 |
|
* |
| 415 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 416 |
|
* Memory freed. |
| 417 |
|
* |
| 418 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 419 |
|
*/ |
| 420 |
|
|
| 421 |
|
void |
| 422 |
|
TkFontPkgFree(mainPtr) |
| 423 |
|
TkMainInfo *mainPtr; /* The application being deleted. */ |
| 424 |
|
{ |
| 425 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
| 426 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr, *searchPtr; |
| 427 |
|
Tcl_HashSearch search; |
| 428 |
|
int fontsLeft; |
| 429 |
|
|
| 430 |
|
fiPtr = mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
| 431 |
|
|
| 432 |
|
fontsLeft = 0; |
| 433 |
|
for (searchPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, &search); |
| 434 |
|
searchPtr != NULL; |
| 435 |
|
searchPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search)) { |
| 436 |
|
fontsLeft++; |
| 437 |
|
fprintf(stderr, "Font %s still in cache.\n", |
| 438 |
|
Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->fontCache, searchPtr)); |
| 439 |
|
} |
| 440 |
|
if (fontsLeft) { |
| 441 |
|
panic("TkFontPkgFree: all fonts should have been freed already"); |
| 442 |
|
} |
| 443 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&fiPtr->fontCache); |
| 444 |
|
|
| 445 |
|
hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search); |
| 446 |
|
while (hPtr != NULL) { |
| 447 |
|
ckfree((char *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hPtr)); |
| 448 |
|
hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search); |
| 449 |
|
} |
| 450 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&fiPtr->namedTable); |
| 451 |
|
if (fiPtr->updatePending != 0) { |
| 452 |
|
Tcl_CancelIdleCall(TheWorldHasChanged, (ClientData) fiPtr); |
| 453 |
|
} |
| 454 |
|
ckfree((char *) fiPtr); |
| 455 |
|
} |
| 456 |
|
|
| 457 |
|
/* |
| 458 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 459 |
|
* |
| 460 |
|
* Tk_FontObjCmd -- |
| 461 |
|
* |
| 462 |
|
* This procedure is implemented to process the "font" Tcl command. |
| 463 |
|
* See the user documentation for details on what it does. |
| 464 |
|
* |
| 465 |
|
* Results: |
| 466 |
|
* A standard Tcl result. |
| 467 |
|
* |
| 468 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 469 |
|
* See the user documentation. |
| 470 |
|
* |
| 471 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 472 |
|
*/ |
| 473 |
|
|
| 474 |
|
int |
| 475 |
|
Tk_FontObjCmd(clientData, interp, objc, objv) |
| 476 |
|
ClientData clientData; /* Main window associated with interpreter. */ |
| 477 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Current interpreter. */ |
| 478 |
|
int objc; /* Number of arguments. */ |
| 479 |
|
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]; /* Argument objects. */ |
| 480 |
|
{ |
| 481 |
|
int index; |
| 482 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; |
| 483 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
| 484 |
|
static char *optionStrings[] = { |
| 485 |
|
"actual", "configure", "create", "delete", |
| 486 |
|
"families", "measure", "metrics", "names", |
| 487 |
|
NULL |
| 488 |
|
}; |
| 489 |
|
enum options { |
| 490 |
|
FONT_ACTUAL, FONT_CONFIGURE, FONT_CREATE, FONT_DELETE, |
| 491 |
|
FONT_FAMILIES, FONT_MEASURE, FONT_METRICS, FONT_NAMES |
| 492 |
|
}; |
| 493 |
|
|
| 494 |
|
tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData; |
| 495 |
|
fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
| 496 |
|
|
| 497 |
|
if (objc < 2) { |
| 498 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "option ?arg?"); |
| 499 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 500 |
|
} |
| 501 |
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[1], optionStrings, "option", 0, |
| 502 |
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
| 503 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 504 |
|
} |
| 505 |
|
|
| 506 |
|
switch ((enum options) index) { |
| 507 |
|
case FONT_ACTUAL: { |
| 508 |
|
int skip, result; |
| 509 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
| 510 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; |
| 511 |
|
CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr; |
| 512 |
|
|
| 513 |
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin); |
| 514 |
|
if (skip < 0) { |
| 515 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 516 |
|
} |
| 517 |
|
if ((objc < 3) || (objc - skip > 4)) { |
| 518 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, |
| 519 |
|
"font ?-displayof window? ?option?"); |
| 520 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 521 |
|
} |
| 522 |
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]); |
| 523 |
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
| 524 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 525 |
|
} |
| 526 |
|
objc -= skip; |
| 527 |
|
objv += skip; |
| 528 |
|
faPtr = GetFontAttributes(tkfont); |
| 529 |
|
objPtr = NULL; |
| 530 |
|
if (objc > 3) { |
| 531 |
|
objPtr = objv[3]; |
| 532 |
|
} |
| 533 |
|
result = GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr); |
| 534 |
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
| 535 |
|
return result; |
| 536 |
|
} |
| 537 |
|
case FONT_CONFIGURE: { |
| 538 |
|
int result; |
| 539 |
|
char *string; |
| 540 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; |
| 541 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 542 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
| 543 |
|
|
| 544 |
|
if (objc < 3) { |
| 545 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?options?"); |
| 546 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 547 |
|
} |
| 548 |
|
string = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); |
| 549 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string); |
| 550 |
|
nfPtr = NULL; /* lint. */ |
| 551 |
|
if (namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
| 552 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
| 553 |
|
} |
| 554 |
|
if ((namedHashPtr == NULL) || (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) { |
| 555 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string, |
| 556 |
|
"\" doesn't exist", NULL); |
| 557 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 558 |
|
} |
| 559 |
|
if (objc == 3) { |
| 560 |
|
objPtr = NULL; |
| 561 |
|
} else if (objc == 4) { |
| 562 |
|
objPtr = objv[3]; |
| 563 |
|
} else { |
| 564 |
|
result = ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - 3, |
| 565 |
|
objv + 3, &nfPtr->fa); |
| 566 |
|
UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr); |
| 567 |
|
return result; |
| 568 |
|
} |
| 569 |
|
return GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, &nfPtr->fa, objPtr); |
| 570 |
|
} |
| 571 |
|
case FONT_CREATE: { |
| 572 |
|
int skip, i; |
| 573 |
|
char *name; |
| 574 |
|
char buf[16 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE]; |
| 575 |
|
TkFontAttributes fa; |
| 576 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
| 577 |
|
|
| 578 |
|
skip = 3; |
| 579 |
|
if (objc < 3) { |
| 580 |
|
name = NULL; |
| 581 |
|
} else { |
| 582 |
|
name = Tcl_GetString(objv[2]); |
| 583 |
|
if (name[0] == '-') { |
| 584 |
|
name = NULL; |
| 585 |
|
} |
| 586 |
|
} |
| 587 |
|
if (name == NULL) { |
| 588 |
|
/* |
| 589 |
|
* No font name specified. Generate one of the form "fontX". |
| 590 |
|
*/ |
| 591 |
|
|
| 592 |
|
for (i = 1; ; i++) { |
| 593 |
|
sprintf(buf, "font%d", i); |
| 594 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, buf); |
| 595 |
|
if (namedHashPtr == NULL) { |
| 596 |
|
break; |
| 597 |
|
} |
| 598 |
|
} |
| 599 |
|
name = buf; |
| 600 |
|
skip = 2; |
| 601 |
|
} |
| 602 |
|
TkInitFontAttributes(&fa); |
| 603 |
|
if (ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc - skip, objv + skip, |
| 604 |
|
&fa) != TCL_OK) { |
| 605 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 606 |
|
} |
| 607 |
|
if (CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, &fa) != TCL_OK) { |
| 608 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 609 |
|
} |
| 610 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, name, NULL); |
| 611 |
|
break; |
| 612 |
|
} |
| 613 |
|
case FONT_DELETE: { |
| 614 |
|
int i; |
| 615 |
|
char *string; |
| 616 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 617 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
| 618 |
|
|
| 619 |
|
/* |
| 620 |
|
* Delete the named font. If there are still widgets using this |
| 621 |
|
* font, then it isn't deleted right away. |
| 622 |
|
*/ |
| 623 |
|
|
| 624 |
|
if (objc < 3) { |
| 625 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "fontname ?fontname ...?"); |
| 626 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 627 |
|
} |
| 628 |
|
for (i = 2; i < objc; i++) { |
| 629 |
|
string = Tcl_GetString(objv[i]); |
| 630 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, string); |
| 631 |
|
if (namedHashPtr == NULL) { |
| 632 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", string, |
| 633 |
|
"\" doesn't exist", (char *) NULL); |
| 634 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 635 |
|
} |
| 636 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
| 637 |
|
if (nfPtr->refCount != 0) { |
| 638 |
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 1; |
| 639 |
|
} else { |
| 640 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(namedHashPtr); |
| 641 |
|
ckfree((char *) nfPtr); |
| 642 |
|
} |
| 643 |
|
} |
| 644 |
|
break; |
| 645 |
|
} |
| 646 |
|
case FONT_FAMILIES: { |
| 647 |
|
int skip; |
| 648 |
|
|
| 649 |
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 2, objv + 2, &tkwin); |
| 650 |
|
if (skip < 0) { |
| 651 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 652 |
|
} |
| 653 |
|
if (objc - skip != 2) { |
| 654 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, "?-displayof window?"); |
| 655 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 656 |
|
} |
| 657 |
|
TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin); |
| 658 |
|
break; |
| 659 |
|
} |
| 660 |
|
case FONT_MEASURE: { |
| 661 |
|
char *string; |
| 662 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
| 663 |
|
int length, skip; |
| 664 |
|
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr; |
| 665 |
|
|
| 666 |
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin); |
| 667 |
|
if (skip < 0) { |
| 668 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 669 |
|
} |
| 670 |
|
if (objc - skip != 4) { |
| 671 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, |
| 672 |
|
"font ?-displayof window? text"); |
| 673 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 674 |
|
} |
| 675 |
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]); |
| 676 |
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
| 677 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 678 |
|
} |
| 679 |
|
string = Tcl_GetStringFromObj(objv[3 + skip], &length); |
| 680 |
|
resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); |
| 681 |
|
Tcl_SetIntObj(resultPtr, Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, length)); |
| 682 |
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
| 683 |
|
break; |
| 684 |
|
} |
| 685 |
|
case FONT_METRICS: { |
| 686 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
| 687 |
|
int skip, index, i; |
| 688 |
|
CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr; |
| 689 |
|
static char *switches[] = { |
| 690 |
|
"-ascent", "-descent", "-linespace", "-fixed", NULL |
| 691 |
|
}; |
| 692 |
|
|
| 693 |
|
skip = TkGetDisplayOf(interp, objc - 3, objv + 3, &tkwin); |
| 694 |
|
if (skip < 0) { |
| 695 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 696 |
|
} |
| 697 |
|
if ((objc < 3) || ((objc - skip) > 4)) { |
| 698 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 2, objv, |
| 699 |
|
"font ?-displayof window? ?option?"); |
| 700 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 701 |
|
} |
| 702 |
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objv[2]); |
| 703 |
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
| 704 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 705 |
|
} |
| 706 |
|
objc -= skip; |
| 707 |
|
objv += skip; |
| 708 |
|
fmPtr = GetFontMetrics(tkfont); |
| 709 |
|
if (objc == 3) { |
| 710 |
|
char buf[64 + TCL_INTEGER_SPACE * 4]; |
| 711 |
|
|
| 712 |
|
sprintf(buf, "-ascent %d -descent %d -linespace %d -fixed %d", |
| 713 |
|
fmPtr->ascent, fmPtr->descent, |
| 714 |
|
fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent, |
| 715 |
|
fmPtr->fixed); |
| 716 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, NULL); |
| 717 |
|
} else { |
| 718 |
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objv[3], switches, |
| 719 |
|
"metric", 0, &index) != TCL_OK) { |
| 720 |
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
| 721 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 722 |
|
} |
| 723 |
|
i = 0; /* Needed only to prevent compiler |
| 724 |
|
* warning. */ |
| 725 |
|
switch (index) { |
| 726 |
|
case 0: i = fmPtr->ascent; break; |
| 727 |
|
case 1: i = fmPtr->descent; break; |
| 728 |
|
case 2: i = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; break; |
| 729 |
|
case 3: i = fmPtr->fixed; break; |
| 730 |
|
} |
| 731 |
|
Tcl_SetIntObj(Tcl_GetObjResult(interp), i); |
| 732 |
|
} |
| 733 |
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont); |
| 734 |
|
break; |
| 735 |
|
} |
| 736 |
|
case FONT_NAMES: { |
| 737 |
|
char *string; |
| 738 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 739 |
|
Tcl_HashSearch search; |
| 740 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
| 741 |
|
Tcl_Obj *strPtr, *resultPtr; |
| 742 |
|
|
| 743 |
|
if (objc != 2) { |
| 744 |
|
Tcl_WrongNumArgs(interp, 1, objv, "names"); |
| 745 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 746 |
|
} |
| 747 |
|
resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); |
| 748 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, &search); |
| 749 |
|
while (namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
| 750 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
| 751 |
|
if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) { |
| 752 |
|
string = Tcl_GetHashKey(&fiPtr->namedTable, namedHashPtr); |
| 753 |
|
strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(string, -1); |
| 754 |
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, strPtr); |
| 755 |
|
} |
| 756 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search); |
| 757 |
|
} |
| 758 |
|
break; |
| 759 |
|
} |
| 760 |
|
} |
| 761 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 762 |
|
} |
| 763 |
|
|
| 764 |
|
/* |
| 765 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 766 |
|
* |
| 767 |
|
* UpdateDependentFonts, TheWorldHasChanged, RecomputeWidgets -- |
| 768 |
|
* |
| 769 |
|
* Called when the attributes of a named font changes. Updates all |
| 770 |
|
* the instantiated fonts that depend on that named font and then |
| 771 |
|
* uses the brute force approach and prepares every widget to |
| 772 |
|
* recompute its geometry. |
| 773 |
|
* |
| 774 |
|
* Results: |
| 775 |
|
* None. |
| 776 |
|
* |
| 777 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 778 |
|
* Things get queued for redisplay. |
| 779 |
|
* |
| 780 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 781 |
|
*/ |
| 782 |
|
|
| 783 |
|
static void |
| 784 |
|
UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr) |
| 785 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; /* Info about application's fonts. */ |
| 786 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* A window in the application. */ |
| 787 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr;/* The named font that is changing. */ |
| 788 |
|
{ |
| 789 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr; |
| 790 |
|
Tcl_HashSearch search; |
| 791 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 792 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 793 |
|
|
| 794 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
| 795 |
|
if (nfPtr->refCount == 0) { |
| 796 |
|
/* |
| 797 |
|
* Well nobody's using this named font, so don't have to tell |
| 798 |
|
* any widgets to recompute themselves. |
| 799 |
|
*/ |
| 800 |
|
|
| 801 |
|
return; |
| 802 |
|
} |
| 803 |
|
|
| 804 |
|
cacheHashPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, &search); |
| 805 |
|
while (cacheHashPtr != NULL) { |
| 806 |
|
for (fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(cacheHashPtr); |
| 807 |
|
fontPtr != NULL; fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 808 |
|
if (fontPtr->namedHashPtr == namedHashPtr) { |
| 809 |
|
TkpGetFontFromAttributes(fontPtr, tkwin, &nfPtr->fa); |
| 810 |
|
if (fiPtr->updatePending == 0) { |
| 811 |
|
fiPtr->updatePending = 1; |
| 812 |
|
Tcl_DoWhenIdle(TheWorldHasChanged, (ClientData) fiPtr); |
| 813 |
|
} |
| 814 |
|
} |
| 815 |
|
} |
| 816 |
|
cacheHashPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search); |
| 817 |
|
} |
| 818 |
|
} |
| 819 |
|
|
| 820 |
|
static void |
| 821 |
|
TheWorldHasChanged(clientData) |
| 822 |
|
ClientData clientData; /* Info about application's fonts. */ |
| 823 |
|
{ |
| 824 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
| 825 |
|
|
| 826 |
|
fiPtr = (TkFontInfo *) clientData; |
| 827 |
|
fiPtr->updatePending = 0; |
| 828 |
|
|
| 829 |
|
RecomputeWidgets(fiPtr->mainPtr->winPtr); |
| 830 |
|
} |
| 831 |
|
|
| 832 |
|
static void |
| 833 |
|
RecomputeWidgets(winPtr) |
| 834 |
|
TkWindow *winPtr; /* Window to which command is sent. */ |
| 835 |
|
{ |
| 836 |
|
if ((winPtr->classProcsPtr != NULL) |
| 837 |
|
&& (winPtr->classProcsPtr->geometryProc != NULL)) { |
| 838 |
|
(*winPtr->classProcsPtr->geometryProc)(winPtr->instanceData); |
| 839 |
|
} |
| 840 |
|
for (winPtr = winPtr->childList; winPtr != NULL; winPtr = winPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 841 |
|
RecomputeWidgets(winPtr); |
| 842 |
|
} |
| 843 |
|
} |
| 844 |
|
|
| 845 |
|
/* |
| 846 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 847 |
|
* |
| 848 |
|
* CreateNamedFont -- |
| 849 |
|
* |
| 850 |
|
* Create the specified named font with the given attributes in the |
| 851 |
|
* named font table associated with the interp. |
| 852 |
|
* |
| 853 |
|
* Results: |
| 854 |
|
* Returns TCL_OK if the font was successfully created, or TCL_ERROR |
| 855 |
|
* if the named font already existed. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an |
| 856 |
|
* error message is left in the interp's result. |
| 857 |
|
* |
| 858 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 859 |
|
* Assume there used to exist a named font by the specified name, and |
| 860 |
|
* that the named font had been deleted, but there were still some |
| 861 |
|
* widgets using the named font at the time it was deleted. If a |
| 862 |
|
* new named font is created with the same name, all those widgets |
| 863 |
|
* that were using the old named font will be redisplayed using |
| 864 |
|
* the new named font's attributes. |
| 865 |
|
* |
| 866 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 867 |
|
*/ |
| 868 |
|
|
| 869 |
|
static int |
| 870 |
|
CreateNamedFont(interp, tkwin, name, faPtr) |
| 871 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for error return. */ |
| 872 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* A window associated with interp. */ |
| 873 |
|
CONST char *name; /* Name for the new named font. */ |
| 874 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Attributes for the new named font. */ |
| 875 |
|
{ |
| 876 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
| 877 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *namedHashPtr; |
| 878 |
|
int new; |
| 879 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 880 |
|
|
| 881 |
|
fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
| 882 |
|
|
| 883 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, name, &new); |
| 884 |
|
|
| 885 |
|
if (new == 0) { |
| 886 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
| 887 |
|
if (nfPtr->deletePending == 0) { |
| 888 |
|
Tcl_ResetResult(interp); |
| 889 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "named font \"", name, |
| 890 |
|
"\" already exists", (char *) NULL); |
| 891 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 892 |
|
} |
| 893 |
|
|
| 894 |
|
/* |
| 895 |
|
* Recreating a named font with the same name as a previous |
| 896 |
|
* named font. Some widgets were still using that named |
| 897 |
|
* font, so they need to get redisplayed. |
| 898 |
|
*/ |
| 899 |
|
|
| 900 |
|
nfPtr->fa = *faPtr; |
| 901 |
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 0; |
| 902 |
|
UpdateDependentFonts(fiPtr, tkwin, namedHashPtr); |
| 903 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 904 |
|
} |
| 905 |
|
|
| 906 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(NamedFont)); |
| 907 |
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 0; |
| 908 |
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(namedHashPtr, nfPtr); |
| 909 |
|
nfPtr->fa = *faPtr; |
| 910 |
|
nfPtr->refCount = 0; |
| 911 |
|
nfPtr->deletePending = 0; |
| 912 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 913 |
|
} |
| 914 |
|
|
| 915 |
|
/* |
| 916 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 917 |
|
* |
| 918 |
|
* Tk_GetFont -- |
| 919 |
|
* |
| 920 |
|
* Given a string description of a font, map the description to a |
| 921 |
|
* corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font. |
| 922 |
|
* |
| 923 |
|
* Results: |
| 924 |
|
* The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error |
| 925 |
|
* prevented the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an |
| 926 |
|
* error message will be left in the interp's result. |
| 927 |
|
* |
| 928 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 929 |
|
* The font is added to an internal database with a reference |
| 930 |
|
* count. For each call to this procedure, there should eventually |
| 931 |
|
* be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the |
| 932 |
|
* database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore. |
| 933 |
|
* |
| 934 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 935 |
|
*/ |
| 936 |
|
|
| 937 |
|
Tk_Font |
| 938 |
|
Tk_GetFont(interp, tkwin, string) |
| 939 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for database and error return. */ |
| 940 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For display on which font will be used. */ |
| 941 |
|
CONST char *string; /* String describing font, as: named font, |
| 942 |
|
* native format, or parseable string. */ |
| 943 |
|
{ |
| 944 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
| 945 |
|
Tcl_Obj *strPtr; |
| 946 |
|
|
| 947 |
|
strPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj((char *) string, -1); |
| 948 |
|
Tcl_IncrRefCount(strPtr); |
| 949 |
|
tkfont = Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, strPtr); |
| 950 |
|
Tcl_DecrRefCount(strPtr); |
| 951 |
|
return tkfont; |
| 952 |
|
} |
| 953 |
|
|
| 954 |
|
/* |
| 955 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 956 |
|
* |
| 957 |
|
* Tk_AllocFontFromObj -- |
| 958 |
|
* |
| 959 |
|
* Given a string description of a font, map the description to a |
| 960 |
|
* corresponding Tk_Font that represents the font. |
| 961 |
|
* |
| 962 |
|
* Results: |
| 963 |
|
* The return value is token for the font, or NULL if an error |
| 964 |
|
* prevented the font from being created. If NULL is returned, an |
| 965 |
|
* error message will be left in interp's result object. |
| 966 |
|
* |
| 967 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 968 |
|
* The font is added to an internal database with a reference |
| 969 |
|
* count. For each call to this procedure, there should eventually |
| 970 |
|
* be a call to Tk_FreeFont() or Tk_FreeFontFromObj() so that the |
| 971 |
|
* database is cleaned up when fonts aren't in use anymore. |
| 972 |
|
* |
| 973 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 974 |
|
*/ |
| 975 |
|
|
| 976 |
|
Tk_Font |
| 977 |
|
Tk_AllocFontFromObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr) |
| 978 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for database and error return. */ |
| 979 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For screen on which font will be used. */ |
| 980 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* Object describing font, as: named font, |
| 981 |
|
* native format, or parseable string. */ |
| 982 |
|
{ |
| 983 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr; |
| 984 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *cacheHashPtr, *namedHashPtr; |
| 985 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr, *firstFontPtr, *oldFontPtr; |
| 986 |
|
int new, descent; |
| 987 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 988 |
|
|
| 989 |
|
fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
| 990 |
|
if (objPtr->typePtr != &fontObjType) { |
| 991 |
|
SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr); |
| 992 |
|
} |
| 993 |
|
|
| 994 |
|
oldFontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
| 995 |
|
|
| 996 |
|
if (oldFontPtr != NULL) { |
| 997 |
|
if (oldFontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) { |
| 998 |
|
/* |
| 999 |
|
* This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's |
| 1000 |
|
* no longer in use. Clear the reference. |
| 1001 |
|
*/ |
| 1002 |
|
|
| 1003 |
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
| 1004 |
|
oldFontPtr = NULL; |
| 1005 |
|
} else if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == oldFontPtr->screen) { |
| 1006 |
|
oldFontPtr->resourceRefCount++; |
| 1007 |
|
return (Tk_Font) oldFontPtr; |
| 1008 |
|
} |
| 1009 |
|
} |
| 1010 |
|
|
| 1011 |
|
/* |
| 1012 |
|
* Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see |
| 1013 |
|
* if one of them is for the right screen. |
| 1014 |
|
*/ |
| 1015 |
|
|
| 1016 |
|
new = 0; |
| 1017 |
|
if (oldFontPtr != NULL) { |
| 1018 |
|
cacheHashPtr = oldFontPtr->cacheHashPtr; |
| 1019 |
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
| 1020 |
|
} else { |
| 1021 |
|
cacheHashPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, |
| 1022 |
|
Tcl_GetString(objPtr), &new); |
| 1023 |
|
} |
| 1024 |
|
firstFontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(cacheHashPtr); |
| 1025 |
|
for (fontPtr = firstFontPtr; (fontPtr != NULL); |
| 1026 |
|
fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1027 |
|
if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) { |
| 1028 |
|
fontPtr->resourceRefCount++; |
| 1029 |
|
fontPtr->objRefCount++; |
| 1030 |
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
| 1031 |
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
| 1032 |
|
} |
| 1033 |
|
} |
| 1034 |
|
|
| 1035 |
|
/* |
| 1036 |
|
* The desired font isn't in the table. Make a new one. |
| 1037 |
|
*/ |
| 1038 |
|
|
| 1039 |
|
namedHashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->namedTable, |
| 1040 |
|
Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); |
| 1041 |
|
if (namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
| 1042 |
|
/* |
| 1043 |
|
* Construct a font based on a named font. |
| 1044 |
|
*/ |
| 1045 |
|
|
| 1046 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(namedHashPtr); |
| 1047 |
|
nfPtr->refCount++; |
| 1048 |
|
|
| 1049 |
|
fontPtr = TkpGetFontFromAttributes(NULL, tkwin, &nfPtr->fa); |
| 1050 |
|
} else { |
| 1051 |
|
/* |
| 1052 |
|
* Native font? |
| 1053 |
|
*/ |
| 1054 |
|
|
| 1055 |
|
fontPtr = TkpGetNativeFont(tkwin, Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); |
| 1056 |
|
if (fontPtr == NULL) { |
| 1057 |
|
TkFontAttributes fa; |
| 1058 |
|
Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(objPtr); |
| 1059 |
|
|
| 1060 |
|
if (ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, dupObjPtr, &fa) != TCL_OK) { |
| 1061 |
|
if (new) { |
| 1062 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(cacheHashPtr); |
| 1063 |
|
} |
| 1064 |
|
Tcl_DecrRefCount(dupObjPtr); |
| 1065 |
|
return NULL; |
| 1066 |
|
} |
| 1067 |
|
Tcl_DecrRefCount(dupObjPtr); |
| 1068 |
|
|
| 1069 |
|
/* |
| 1070 |
|
* String contained the attributes inline. |
| 1071 |
|
*/ |
| 1072 |
|
|
| 1073 |
|
fontPtr = TkpGetFontFromAttributes(NULL, tkwin, &fa); |
| 1074 |
|
} |
| 1075 |
|
} |
| 1076 |
|
|
| 1077 |
|
fontPtr->resourceRefCount = 1; |
| 1078 |
|
fontPtr->objRefCount = 1; |
| 1079 |
|
fontPtr->cacheHashPtr = cacheHashPtr; |
| 1080 |
|
fontPtr->namedHashPtr = namedHashPtr; |
| 1081 |
|
fontPtr->screen = Tk_Screen(tkwin); |
| 1082 |
|
fontPtr->nextPtr = firstFontPtr; |
| 1083 |
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(cacheHashPtr, fontPtr); |
| 1084 |
|
|
| 1085 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars((Tk_Font) fontPtr, "0", 1, -1, 0, &fontPtr->tabWidth); |
| 1086 |
|
if (fontPtr->tabWidth == 0) { |
| 1087 |
|
fontPtr->tabWidth = fontPtr->fm.maxWidth; |
| 1088 |
|
} |
| 1089 |
|
fontPtr->tabWidth *= 8; |
| 1090 |
|
|
| 1091 |
|
/* |
| 1092 |
|
* Make sure the tab width isn't zero (some fonts may not have enough |
| 1093 |
|
* information to set a reasonable tab width). |
| 1094 |
|
*/ |
| 1095 |
|
|
| 1096 |
|
if (fontPtr->tabWidth == 0) { |
| 1097 |
|
fontPtr->tabWidth = 1; |
| 1098 |
|
} |
| 1099 |
|
|
| 1100 |
|
/* |
| 1101 |
|
* Get information used for drawing underlines in generic code on a |
| 1102 |
|
* non-underlined font. |
| 1103 |
|
*/ |
| 1104 |
|
|
| 1105 |
|
descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; |
| 1106 |
|
fontPtr->underlinePos = descent / 2; |
| 1107 |
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, fontPtr->fa.size) / 10; |
| 1108 |
|
if (fontPtr->underlineHeight == 0) { |
| 1109 |
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = 1; |
| 1110 |
|
} |
| 1111 |
|
if (fontPtr->underlinePos + fontPtr->underlineHeight > descent) { |
| 1112 |
|
/* |
| 1113 |
|
* If this set of values would cause the bottom of the underline |
| 1114 |
|
* bar to stick below the descent of the font, jack the underline |
| 1115 |
|
* up a bit higher. |
| 1116 |
|
*/ |
| 1117 |
|
|
| 1118 |
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = descent - fontPtr->underlinePos; |
| 1119 |
|
if (fontPtr->underlineHeight == 0) { |
| 1120 |
|
fontPtr->underlinePos--; |
| 1121 |
|
fontPtr->underlineHeight = 1; |
| 1122 |
|
} |
| 1123 |
|
} |
| 1124 |
|
|
| 1125 |
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
| 1126 |
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
| 1127 |
|
} |
| 1128 |
|
|
| 1129 |
|
/* |
| 1130 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1131 |
|
* |
| 1132 |
|
* Tk_GetFontFromObj -- |
| 1133 |
|
* |
| 1134 |
|
* Find the font that corresponds to a given object. The font must |
| 1135 |
|
* have already been created by Tk_GetFont or Tk_AllocFontFromObj. |
| 1136 |
|
* |
| 1137 |
|
* Results: |
| 1138 |
|
* The return value is a token for the font that matches objPtr |
| 1139 |
|
* and is suitable for use in tkwin. |
| 1140 |
|
* |
| 1141 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1142 |
|
* If the object is not already a font ref, the conversion will free |
| 1143 |
|
* any old internal representation. |
| 1144 |
|
* |
| 1145 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1146 |
|
*/ |
| 1147 |
|
|
| 1148 |
|
Tk_Font |
| 1149 |
|
Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr) |
| 1150 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* The window that the font will be used in. */ |
| 1151 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The object from which to get the font. */ |
| 1152 |
|
{ |
| 1153 |
|
TkFontInfo *fiPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr; |
| 1154 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1155 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; |
| 1156 |
|
|
| 1157 |
|
if (objPtr->typePtr != &fontObjType) { |
| 1158 |
|
SetFontFromAny((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, objPtr); |
| 1159 |
|
} |
| 1160 |
|
|
| 1161 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
| 1162 |
|
|
| 1163 |
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
| 1164 |
|
if (fontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) { |
| 1165 |
|
/* |
| 1166 |
|
* This is a stale reference: it refers to a TkFont that's |
| 1167 |
|
* no longer in use. Clear the reference. |
| 1168 |
|
*/ |
| 1169 |
|
|
| 1170 |
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
| 1171 |
|
fontPtr = NULL; |
| 1172 |
|
} else if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) { |
| 1173 |
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
| 1174 |
|
} |
| 1175 |
|
} |
| 1176 |
|
|
| 1177 |
|
/* |
| 1178 |
|
* Next, search the list of fonts that have the name we want, to see |
| 1179 |
|
* if one of them is for the right screen. |
| 1180 |
|
*/ |
| 1181 |
|
|
| 1182 |
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
| 1183 |
|
hashPtr = fontPtr->cacheHashPtr; |
| 1184 |
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr); |
| 1185 |
|
} else { |
| 1186 |
|
hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry(&fiPtr->fontCache, Tcl_GetString(objPtr)); |
| 1187 |
|
} |
| 1188 |
|
if (hashPtr != NULL) { |
| 1189 |
|
for (fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr); fontPtr != NULL; |
| 1190 |
|
fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 1191 |
|
if (Tk_Screen(tkwin) == fontPtr->screen) { |
| 1192 |
|
fontPtr->objRefCount++; |
| 1193 |
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
| 1194 |
|
return (Tk_Font) fontPtr; |
| 1195 |
|
} |
| 1196 |
|
} |
| 1197 |
|
} |
| 1198 |
|
|
| 1199 |
|
panic("Tk_GetFontFromObj called with non-existent font!"); |
| 1200 |
|
return NULL; |
| 1201 |
|
} |
| 1202 |
|
|
| 1203 |
|
/* |
| 1204 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1205 |
|
* |
| 1206 |
|
* SetFontFromAny -- |
| 1207 |
|
* |
| 1208 |
|
* Convert the internal representation of a Tcl object to the |
| 1209 |
|
* font internal form. |
| 1210 |
|
* |
| 1211 |
|
* Results: |
| 1212 |
|
* Always returns TCL_OK. |
| 1213 |
|
* |
| 1214 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1215 |
|
* The object is left with its typePtr pointing to fontObjType. |
| 1216 |
|
* The TkFont pointer is NULL. |
| 1217 |
|
* |
| 1218 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1219 |
|
*/ |
| 1220 |
|
|
| 1221 |
|
static int |
| 1222 |
|
SetFontFromAny(interp, objPtr) |
| 1223 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Used for error reporting if not NULL. */ |
| 1224 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The object to convert. */ |
| 1225 |
|
{ |
| 1226 |
|
Tcl_ObjType *typePtr; |
| 1227 |
|
|
| 1228 |
|
/* |
| 1229 |
|
* Free the old internalRep before setting the new one. |
| 1230 |
|
*/ |
| 1231 |
|
|
| 1232 |
|
Tcl_GetString(objPtr); |
| 1233 |
|
typePtr = objPtr->typePtr; |
| 1234 |
|
if ((typePtr != NULL) && (typePtr->freeIntRepProc != NULL)) { |
| 1235 |
|
(*typePtr->freeIntRepProc)(objPtr); |
| 1236 |
|
} |
| 1237 |
|
objPtr->typePtr = &fontObjType; |
| 1238 |
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL; |
| 1239 |
|
|
| 1240 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 1241 |
|
} |
| 1242 |
|
|
| 1243 |
|
/* |
| 1244 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1245 |
|
* |
| 1246 |
|
* Tk_NameOfFont -- |
| 1247 |
|
* |
| 1248 |
|
* Given a font, return a textual string identifying it. |
| 1249 |
|
* |
| 1250 |
|
* Results: |
| 1251 |
|
* The return value is the description that was passed to |
| 1252 |
|
* Tk_GetFont() to create the font. The storage for the returned |
| 1253 |
|
* string is only guaranteed to persist until the font is deleted. |
| 1254 |
|
* The caller should not modify this string. |
| 1255 |
|
* |
| 1256 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1257 |
|
* None. |
| 1258 |
|
* |
| 1259 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1260 |
|
*/ |
| 1261 |
|
|
| 1262 |
|
char * |
| 1263 |
|
Tk_NameOfFont(tkfont) |
| 1264 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font whose name is desired. */ |
| 1265 |
|
{ |
| 1266 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1267 |
|
|
| 1268 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1269 |
|
return fontPtr->cacheHashPtr->key.string; |
| 1270 |
|
} |
| 1271 |
|
|
| 1272 |
|
/* |
| 1273 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1274 |
|
* |
| 1275 |
|
* Tk_FreeFont -- |
| 1276 |
|
* |
| 1277 |
|
* Called to release a font allocated by Tk_GetFont(). |
| 1278 |
|
* |
| 1279 |
|
* Results: |
| 1280 |
|
* None. |
| 1281 |
|
* |
| 1282 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1283 |
|
* The reference count associated with font is decremented, and |
| 1284 |
|
* only deallocated when no one is using it. |
| 1285 |
|
* |
| 1286 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1287 |
|
*/ |
| 1288 |
|
|
| 1289 |
|
void |
| 1290 |
|
Tk_FreeFont(tkfont) |
| 1291 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font to be released. */ |
| 1292 |
|
{ |
| 1293 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr, *prevPtr; |
| 1294 |
|
NamedFont *nfPtr; |
| 1295 |
|
|
| 1296 |
|
if (tkfont == NULL) { |
| 1297 |
|
return; |
| 1298 |
|
} |
| 1299 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1300 |
|
fontPtr->resourceRefCount--; |
| 1301 |
|
if (fontPtr->resourceRefCount > 0) { |
| 1302 |
|
return; |
| 1303 |
|
} |
| 1304 |
|
if (fontPtr->namedHashPtr != NULL) { |
| 1305 |
|
/* |
| 1306 |
|
* This font derived from a named font. Reduce the reference |
| 1307 |
|
* count on the named font and free it if no-one else is |
| 1308 |
|
* using it. |
| 1309 |
|
*/ |
| 1310 |
|
|
| 1311 |
|
nfPtr = (NamedFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(fontPtr->namedHashPtr); |
| 1312 |
|
nfPtr->refCount--; |
| 1313 |
|
if ((nfPtr->refCount == 0) && (nfPtr->deletePending != 0)) { |
| 1314 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(fontPtr->namedHashPtr); |
| 1315 |
|
ckfree((char *) nfPtr); |
| 1316 |
|
} |
| 1317 |
|
} |
| 1318 |
|
|
| 1319 |
|
prevPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr); |
| 1320 |
|
if (prevPtr == fontPtr) { |
| 1321 |
|
if (fontPtr->nextPtr == NULL) { |
| 1322 |
|
Tcl_DeleteHashEntry(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr); |
| 1323 |
|
} else { |
| 1324 |
|
Tcl_SetHashValue(fontPtr->cacheHashPtr, fontPtr->nextPtr); |
| 1325 |
|
} |
| 1326 |
|
} else { |
| 1327 |
|
while (prevPtr->nextPtr != fontPtr) { |
| 1328 |
|
prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1329 |
|
} |
| 1330 |
|
prevPtr->nextPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr; |
| 1331 |
|
} |
| 1332 |
|
|
| 1333 |
|
TkpDeleteFont(fontPtr); |
| 1334 |
|
if (fontPtr->objRefCount == 0) { |
| 1335 |
|
ckfree((char *) fontPtr); |
| 1336 |
|
} |
| 1337 |
|
} |
| 1338 |
|
|
| 1339 |
|
/* |
| 1340 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1341 |
|
* |
| 1342 |
|
* Tk_FreeFontFromObj -- |
| 1343 |
|
* |
| 1344 |
|
* Called to release a font inside a Tcl_Obj *. Decrements the refCount |
| 1345 |
|
* of the font and removes it from the hash tables if necessary. |
| 1346 |
|
* |
| 1347 |
|
* Results: |
| 1348 |
|
* None. |
| 1349 |
|
* |
| 1350 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1351 |
|
* The reference count associated with font is decremented, and |
| 1352 |
|
* only deallocated when no one is using it. |
| 1353 |
|
* |
| 1354 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1355 |
|
*/ |
| 1356 |
|
|
| 1357 |
|
void |
| 1358 |
|
Tk_FreeFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr) |
| 1359 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* The window this font lives in. Needed |
| 1360 |
|
* for the screen value. */ |
| 1361 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The Tcl_Obj * to be freed. */ |
| 1362 |
|
{ |
| 1363 |
|
Tk_FreeFont(Tk_GetFontFromObj(tkwin, objPtr)); |
| 1364 |
|
} |
| 1365 |
|
|
| 1366 |
|
/* |
| 1367 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1368 |
|
* |
| 1369 |
|
* FreeFontObjProc -- |
| 1370 |
|
* |
| 1371 |
|
* This proc is called to release an object reference to a font. |
| 1372 |
|
* Called when the object's internal rep is released or when |
| 1373 |
|
* the cached fontPtr needs to be changed. |
| 1374 |
|
* |
| 1375 |
|
* Results: |
| 1376 |
|
* None. |
| 1377 |
|
* |
| 1378 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1379 |
|
* The object reference count is decremented. When both it |
| 1380 |
|
* and the hash ref count go to zero, the font's resources |
| 1381 |
|
* are released. |
| 1382 |
|
* |
| 1383 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1384 |
|
*/ |
| 1385 |
|
|
| 1386 |
|
static void |
| 1387 |
|
FreeFontObjProc(objPtr) |
| 1388 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* The object we are releasing. */ |
| 1389 |
|
{ |
| 1390 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
| 1391 |
|
|
| 1392 |
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
| 1393 |
|
fontPtr->objRefCount--; |
| 1394 |
|
if ((fontPtr->resourceRefCount == 0) && (fontPtr->objRefCount == 0)) { |
| 1395 |
|
ckfree((char *) fontPtr); |
| 1396 |
|
objPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = NULL; |
| 1397 |
|
} |
| 1398 |
|
} |
| 1399 |
|
} |
| 1400 |
|
|
| 1401 |
|
/* |
| 1402 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1403 |
|
* |
| 1404 |
|
* DupFontObjProc -- |
| 1405 |
|
* |
| 1406 |
|
* When a cached font object is duplicated, this is called to |
| 1407 |
|
* update the internal reps. |
| 1408 |
|
* |
| 1409 |
|
* Results: |
| 1410 |
|
* None. |
| 1411 |
|
* |
| 1412 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1413 |
|
* The font's objRefCount is incremented and the internal rep |
| 1414 |
|
* of the copy is set to point to it. |
| 1415 |
|
* |
| 1416 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1417 |
|
*/ |
| 1418 |
|
|
| 1419 |
|
static void |
| 1420 |
|
DupFontObjProc(srcObjPtr, dupObjPtr) |
| 1421 |
|
Tcl_Obj *srcObjPtr; /* The object we are copying from. */ |
| 1422 |
|
Tcl_Obj *dupObjPtr; /* The object we are copying to. */ |
| 1423 |
|
{ |
| 1424 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr = (TkFont *) srcObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1; |
| 1425 |
|
|
| 1426 |
|
dupObjPtr->typePtr = srcObjPtr->typePtr; |
| 1427 |
|
dupObjPtr->internalRep.twoPtrValue.ptr1 = (VOID *) fontPtr; |
| 1428 |
|
|
| 1429 |
|
if (fontPtr != NULL) { |
| 1430 |
|
fontPtr->objRefCount++; |
| 1431 |
|
} |
| 1432 |
|
} |
| 1433 |
|
|
| 1434 |
|
/* |
| 1435 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1436 |
|
* |
| 1437 |
|
* Tk_FontId -- |
| 1438 |
|
* |
| 1439 |
|
* Given a font, return an opaque handle that should be selected |
| 1440 |
|
* into the XGCValues structure in order to get the constructed |
| 1441 |
|
* gc to use this font. This procedure would go away if the |
| 1442 |
|
* XGCValues structure were replaced with a TkGCValues structure. |
| 1443 |
|
* |
| 1444 |
|
* Results: |
| 1445 |
|
* As above. |
| 1446 |
|
* |
| 1447 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1448 |
|
* None. |
| 1449 |
|
* |
| 1450 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1451 |
|
*/ |
| 1452 |
|
|
| 1453 |
|
Font |
| 1454 |
|
Tk_FontId(tkfont) |
| 1455 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font that is going to be selected into GC. */ |
| 1456 |
|
{ |
| 1457 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1458 |
|
|
| 1459 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1460 |
|
return fontPtr->fid; |
| 1461 |
|
} |
| 1462 |
|
|
| 1463 |
|
/* |
| 1464 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1465 |
|
* |
| 1466 |
|
* Tk_GetFontMetrics -- |
| 1467 |
|
* |
| 1468 |
|
* Returns overall ascent and descent metrics for the given font. |
| 1469 |
|
* These values can be used to space multiple lines of text and |
| 1470 |
|
* to align the baselines of text in different fonts. |
| 1471 |
|
* |
| 1472 |
|
* Results: |
| 1473 |
|
* If *heightPtr is non-NULL, it is filled with the overall height |
| 1474 |
|
* of the font, which is the sum of the ascent and descent. |
| 1475 |
|
* If *ascentPtr or *descentPtr is non-NULL, they are filled with |
| 1476 |
|
* the ascent and/or descent information for the font. |
| 1477 |
|
* |
| 1478 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1479 |
|
* None. |
| 1480 |
|
* |
| 1481 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1482 |
|
*/ |
| 1483 |
|
void |
| 1484 |
|
Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, fmPtr) |
| 1485 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which metrics are calculated. */ |
| 1486 |
|
Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr; /* Pointer to structure in which font |
| 1487 |
|
* metrics for tkfont will be stored. */ |
| 1488 |
|
{ |
| 1489 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1490 |
|
|
| 1491 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1492 |
|
fmPtr->ascent = fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
| 1493 |
|
fmPtr->descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; |
| 1494 |
|
fmPtr->linespace = fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
| 1495 |
|
} |
| 1496 |
|
|
| 1497 |
|
/* |
| 1498 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1499 |
|
* |
| 1500 |
|
* Tk_PostscriptFontName -- |
| 1501 |
|
* |
| 1502 |
|
* Given a Tk_Font, return the name of the corresponding Postscript |
| 1503 |
|
* font. |
| 1504 |
|
* |
| 1505 |
|
* Results: |
| 1506 |
|
* The return value is the pointsize of the given Tk_Font. |
| 1507 |
|
* The name of the Postscript font is appended to dsPtr. |
| 1508 |
|
* |
| 1509 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1510 |
|
* If the font does not exist on the printer, the print job will |
| 1511 |
|
* fail at print time. Given a "reasonable" Postscript printer, |
| 1512 |
|
* the following Tk_Font font families should print correctly: |
| 1513 |
|
* |
| 1514 |
|
* Avant Garde, Arial, Bookman, Courier, Courier New, Geneva, |
| 1515 |
|
* Helvetica, Monaco, New Century Schoolbook, New York, |
| 1516 |
|
* Palatino, Symbol, Times, Times New Roman, Zapf Chancery, |
| 1517 |
|
* and Zapf Dingbats. |
| 1518 |
|
* |
| 1519 |
|
* Any other Tk_Font font families may not print correctly |
| 1520 |
|
* because the computed Postscript font name may be incorrect. |
| 1521 |
|
* |
| 1522 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1523 |
|
*/ |
| 1524 |
|
|
| 1525 |
|
int |
| 1526 |
|
Tk_PostscriptFontName(tkfont, dsPtr) |
| 1527 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which text will be printed. */ |
| 1528 |
|
Tcl_DString *dsPtr; /* Pointer to an initialized Tcl_DString to |
| 1529 |
|
* which the name of the Postscript font that |
| 1530 |
|
* corresponds to tkfont will be appended. */ |
| 1531 |
|
{ |
| 1532 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1533 |
|
char *family, *weightString, *slantString; |
| 1534 |
|
char *src, *dest; |
| 1535 |
|
int upper, len; |
| 1536 |
|
|
| 1537 |
|
len = Tcl_DStringLength(dsPtr); |
| 1538 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1539 |
|
|
| 1540 |
|
/* |
| 1541 |
|
* Convert the case-insensitive Tk_Font family name to the |
| 1542 |
|
* case-sensitive Postscript family name. Take out any spaces and |
| 1543 |
|
* capitalize the first letter of each word. |
| 1544 |
|
*/ |
| 1545 |
|
|
| 1546 |
|
family = fontPtr->fa.family; |
| 1547 |
|
if (strncasecmp(family, "itc ", 4) == 0) { |
| 1548 |
|
family = family + 4; |
| 1549 |
|
} |
| 1550 |
|
if ((strcasecmp(family, "Arial") == 0) |
| 1551 |
|
|| (strcasecmp(family, "Geneva") == 0)) { |
| 1552 |
|
family = "Helvetica"; |
| 1553 |
|
} else if ((strcasecmp(family, "Times New Roman") == 0) |
| 1554 |
|
|| (strcasecmp(family, "New York") == 0)) { |
| 1555 |
|
family = "Times"; |
| 1556 |
|
} else if ((strcasecmp(family, "Courier New") == 0) |
| 1557 |
|
|| (strcasecmp(family, "Monaco") == 0)) { |
| 1558 |
|
family = "Courier"; |
| 1559 |
|
} else if (strcasecmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0) { |
| 1560 |
|
family = "AvantGarde"; |
| 1561 |
|
} else if (strcasecmp(family, "ZapfChancery") == 0) { |
| 1562 |
|
family = "ZapfChancery"; |
| 1563 |
|
} else if (strcasecmp(family, "ZapfDingbats") == 0) { |
| 1564 |
|
family = "ZapfDingbats"; |
| 1565 |
|
} else { |
| 1566 |
|
Tcl_UniChar ch; |
| 1567 |
|
|
| 1568 |
|
/* |
| 1569 |
|
* Inline, capitalize the first letter of each word, lowercase the |
| 1570 |
|
* rest of the letters in each word, and then take out the spaces |
| 1571 |
|
* between the words. This may make the DString shorter, which is |
| 1572 |
|
* safe to do. |
| 1573 |
|
*/ |
| 1574 |
|
|
| 1575 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, -1); |
| 1576 |
|
|
| 1577 |
|
src = dest = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
| 1578 |
|
upper = 1; |
| 1579 |
|
for (; *src != '\0'; ) { |
| 1580 |
|
while (isspace(UCHAR(*src))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ |
| 1581 |
|
src++; |
| 1582 |
|
upper = 1; |
| 1583 |
|
} |
| 1584 |
|
src += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(src, &ch); |
| 1585 |
|
if (upper) { |
| 1586 |
|
ch = Tcl_UniCharToUpper(ch); |
| 1587 |
|
upper = 0; |
| 1588 |
|
} else { |
| 1589 |
|
ch = Tcl_UniCharToLower(ch); |
| 1590 |
|
} |
| 1591 |
|
dest += Tcl_UniCharToUtf(ch, dest); |
| 1592 |
|
} |
| 1593 |
|
*dest = '\0'; |
| 1594 |
|
Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, dest - Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr)); |
| 1595 |
|
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
| 1596 |
|
} |
| 1597 |
|
if (family != Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len) { |
| 1598 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, family, -1); |
| 1599 |
|
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
| 1600 |
|
} |
| 1601 |
|
|
| 1602 |
|
if (strcasecmp(family, "NewCenturySchoolbook") == 0) { |
| 1603 |
|
Tcl_DStringSetLength(dsPtr, len); |
| 1604 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "NewCenturySchlbk", -1); |
| 1605 |
|
family = Tcl_DStringValue(dsPtr) + len; |
| 1606 |
|
} |
| 1607 |
|
|
| 1608 |
|
/* |
| 1609 |
|
* Get the string to use for the weight. |
| 1610 |
|
*/ |
| 1611 |
|
|
| 1612 |
|
weightString = NULL; |
| 1613 |
|
if (fontPtr->fa.weight == TK_FW_NORMAL) { |
| 1614 |
|
if (strcmp(family, "Bookman") == 0) { |
| 1615 |
|
weightString = "Light"; |
| 1616 |
|
} else if (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0) { |
| 1617 |
|
weightString = "Book"; |
| 1618 |
|
} else if (strcmp(family, "ZapfChancery") == 0) { |
| 1619 |
|
weightString = "Medium"; |
| 1620 |
|
} |
| 1621 |
|
} else { |
| 1622 |
|
if ((strcmp(family, "Bookman") == 0) |
| 1623 |
|
|| (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0)) { |
| 1624 |
|
weightString = "Demi"; |
| 1625 |
|
} else { |
| 1626 |
|
weightString = "Bold"; |
| 1627 |
|
} |
| 1628 |
|
} |
| 1629 |
|
|
| 1630 |
|
/* |
| 1631 |
|
* Get the string to use for the slant. |
| 1632 |
|
*/ |
| 1633 |
|
|
| 1634 |
|
slantString = NULL; |
| 1635 |
|
if (fontPtr->fa.slant == TK_FS_ROMAN) { |
| 1636 |
|
; |
| 1637 |
|
} else { |
| 1638 |
|
if ((strcmp(family, "Helvetica") == 0) |
| 1639 |
|
|| (strcmp(family, "Courier") == 0) |
| 1640 |
|
|| (strcmp(family, "AvantGarde") == 0)) { |
| 1641 |
|
slantString = "Oblique"; |
| 1642 |
|
} else { |
| 1643 |
|
slantString = "Italic"; |
| 1644 |
|
} |
| 1645 |
|
} |
| 1646 |
|
|
| 1647 |
|
/* |
| 1648 |
|
* The string "Roman" needs to be added to some fonts that are not bold |
| 1649 |
|
* and not italic. |
| 1650 |
|
*/ |
| 1651 |
|
|
| 1652 |
|
if ((slantString == NULL) && (weightString == NULL)) { |
| 1653 |
|
if ((strcmp(family, "Times") == 0) |
| 1654 |
|
|| (strcmp(family, "NewCenturySchlbk") == 0) |
| 1655 |
|
|| (strcmp(family, "Palatino") == 0)) { |
| 1656 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-Roman", -1); |
| 1657 |
|
} |
| 1658 |
|
} else { |
| 1659 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, "-", -1); |
| 1660 |
|
if (weightString != NULL) { |
| 1661 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, weightString, -1); |
| 1662 |
|
} |
| 1663 |
|
if (slantString != NULL) { |
| 1664 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(dsPtr, slantString, -1); |
| 1665 |
|
} |
| 1666 |
|
} |
| 1667 |
|
|
| 1668 |
|
return fontPtr->fa.size; |
| 1669 |
|
} |
| 1670 |
|
|
| 1671 |
|
/* |
| 1672 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1673 |
|
* |
| 1674 |
|
* Tk_TextWidth -- |
| 1675 |
|
* |
| 1676 |
|
* A wrapper function for the more complicated interface of |
| 1677 |
|
* Tk_MeasureChars. Computes how much space the given |
| 1678 |
|
* simple string needs. |
| 1679 |
|
* |
| 1680 |
|
* Results: |
| 1681 |
|
* The return value is the width (in pixels) of the given string. |
| 1682 |
|
* |
| 1683 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1684 |
|
* None. |
| 1685 |
|
* |
| 1686 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1687 |
|
*/ |
| 1688 |
|
|
| 1689 |
|
int |
| 1690 |
|
Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, string, numBytes) |
| 1691 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font in which text will be measured. */ |
| 1692 |
|
CONST char *string; /* String whose width will be computed. */ |
| 1693 |
|
int numBytes; /* Number of bytes to consider from |
| 1694 |
|
* string, or < 0 for strlen(). */ |
| 1695 |
|
{ |
| 1696 |
|
int width; |
| 1697 |
|
|
| 1698 |
|
if (numBytes < 0) { |
| 1699 |
|
numBytes = strlen(string); |
| 1700 |
|
} |
| 1701 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, numBytes, -1, 0, &width); |
| 1702 |
|
return width; |
| 1703 |
|
} |
| 1704 |
|
|
| 1705 |
|
/* |
| 1706 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1707 |
|
* |
| 1708 |
|
* Tk_UnderlineChars -- |
| 1709 |
|
* |
| 1710 |
|
* This procedure draws an underline for a given range of characters |
| 1711 |
|
* in a given string. It doesn't draw the characters (which are |
| 1712 |
|
* assumed to have been displayed previously); it just draws the |
| 1713 |
|
* underline. This procedure would mainly be used to quickly |
| 1714 |
|
* underline a few characters without having to construct an |
| 1715 |
|
* underlined font. To produce properly underlined text, the |
| 1716 |
|
* appropriate underlined font should be constructed and used. |
| 1717 |
|
* |
| 1718 |
|
* Results: |
| 1719 |
|
* None. |
| 1720 |
|
* |
| 1721 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1722 |
|
* Information gets displayed in "drawable". |
| 1723 |
|
* |
| 1724 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1725 |
|
*/ |
| 1726 |
|
|
| 1727 |
|
void |
| 1728 |
|
Tk_UnderlineChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, string, x, y, firstByte, |
| 1729 |
|
lastByte) |
| 1730 |
|
Display *display; /* Display on which to draw. */ |
| 1731 |
|
Drawable drawable; /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ |
| 1732 |
|
GC gc; /* Graphics context for actually drawing |
| 1733 |
|
* line. */ |
| 1734 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font used in GC; must have been allocated |
| 1735 |
|
* by Tk_GetFont(). Used for character |
| 1736 |
|
* dimensions, etc. */ |
| 1737 |
|
CONST char *string; /* String containing characters to be |
| 1738 |
|
* underlined or overstruck. */ |
| 1739 |
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates at which first character of |
| 1740 |
|
* string is drawn. */ |
| 1741 |
|
int firstByte; /* Index of first byte of first character. */ |
| 1742 |
|
int lastByte; /* Index of first byte after the last |
| 1743 |
|
* character. */ |
| 1744 |
|
{ |
| 1745 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1746 |
|
int startX, endX; |
| 1747 |
|
|
| 1748 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1749 |
|
|
| 1750 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, firstByte, -1, 0, &startX); |
| 1751 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, string, lastByte, -1, 0, &endX); |
| 1752 |
|
|
| 1753 |
|
XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + startX, |
| 1754 |
|
y + fontPtr->underlinePos, (unsigned int) (endX - startX), |
| 1755 |
|
(unsigned int) fontPtr->underlineHeight); |
| 1756 |
|
} |
| 1757 |
|
|
| 1758 |
|
/* |
| 1759 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1760 |
|
* |
| 1761 |
|
* Tk_ComputeTextLayout -- |
| 1762 |
|
* |
| 1763 |
|
* Computes the amount of screen space needed to display a |
| 1764 |
|
* multi-line, justified string of text. Records all the |
| 1765 |
|
* measurements that were done to determine to size and |
| 1766 |
|
* positioning of the individual lines of text; this information |
| 1767 |
|
* can be used by the Tk_DrawTextLayout() procedure to |
| 1768 |
|
* display the text quickly (without remeasuring it). |
| 1769 |
|
* |
| 1770 |
|
* This procedure is useful for simple widgets that want to |
| 1771 |
|
* display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle the |
| 1772 |
|
* details. |
| 1773 |
|
* |
| 1774 |
|
* Results: |
| 1775 |
|
* The return value is a Tk_TextLayout token that holds the |
| 1776 |
|
* measurement information for the given string. The token is |
| 1777 |
|
* only valid for the given string. If the string is freed, |
| 1778 |
|
* the token is no longer valid and must also be freed. To free |
| 1779 |
|
* the token, call Tk_FreeTextLayout(). |
| 1780 |
|
* |
| 1781 |
|
* The dimensions of the screen area needed to display the text |
| 1782 |
|
* are stored in *widthPtr and *heightPtr. |
| 1783 |
|
* |
| 1784 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 1785 |
|
* Memory is allocated to hold the measurement information. |
| 1786 |
|
* |
| 1787 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 1788 |
|
*/ |
| 1789 |
|
|
| 1790 |
|
Tk_TextLayout |
| 1791 |
|
Tk_ComputeTextLayout(tkfont, string, numChars, wrapLength, justify, flags, |
| 1792 |
|
widthPtr, heightPtr) |
| 1793 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; /* Font that will be used to display text. */ |
| 1794 |
|
CONST char *string; /* String whose dimensions are to be |
| 1795 |
|
* computed. */ |
| 1796 |
|
int numChars; /* Number of characters to consider from |
| 1797 |
|
* string, or < 0 for strlen(). */ |
| 1798 |
|
int wrapLength; /* Longest permissible line length, in |
| 1799 |
|
* pixels. <= 0 means no automatic wrapping: |
| 1800 |
|
* just let lines get as long as needed. */ |
| 1801 |
|
Tk_Justify justify; /* How to justify lines. */ |
| 1802 |
|
int flags; /* Flag bits OR-ed together. |
| 1803 |
|
* TK_IGNORE_TABS means that tab characters |
| 1804 |
|
* should not be expanded. TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES |
| 1805 |
|
* means that newline characters should not |
| 1806 |
|
* cause a line break. */ |
| 1807 |
|
int *widthPtr; /* Filled with width of string. */ |
| 1808 |
|
int *heightPtr; /* Filled with height of string. */ |
| 1809 |
|
{ |
| 1810 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 1811 |
|
CONST char *start, *end, *special; |
| 1812 |
|
int n, y, bytesThisChunk, maxChunks; |
| 1813 |
|
int baseline, height, curX, newX, maxWidth; |
| 1814 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 1815 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 1816 |
|
CONST TkFontMetrics *fmPtr; |
| 1817 |
|
Tcl_DString lineBuffer; |
| 1818 |
|
int *lineLengths; |
| 1819 |
|
int curLine, layoutHeight; |
| 1820 |
|
|
| 1821 |
|
Tcl_DStringInit(&lineBuffer); |
| 1822 |
|
|
| 1823 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 1824 |
|
if ((fontPtr == NULL) || (string == NULL)) { |
| 1825 |
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
| 1826 |
|
*widthPtr = 0; |
| 1827 |
|
} |
| 1828 |
|
if (heightPtr != NULL) { |
| 1829 |
|
*heightPtr = 0; |
| 1830 |
|
} |
| 1831 |
|
return NULL; |
| 1832 |
|
} |
| 1833 |
|
|
| 1834 |
|
fmPtr = &fontPtr->fm; |
| 1835 |
|
|
| 1836 |
|
height = fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent; |
| 1837 |
|
|
| 1838 |
|
if (numChars < 0) { |
| 1839 |
|
numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(string, -1); |
| 1840 |
|
} |
| 1841 |
|
if (wrapLength == 0) { |
| 1842 |
|
wrapLength = -1; |
| 1843 |
|
} |
| 1844 |
|
|
| 1845 |
|
maxChunks = 1; |
| 1846 |
|
|
| 1847 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) ckalloc(sizeof(TextLayout) |
| 1848 |
|
+ (maxChunks - 1) * sizeof(LayoutChunk)); |
| 1849 |
|
layoutPtr->tkfont = tkfont; |
| 1850 |
|
layoutPtr->string = string; |
| 1851 |
|
layoutPtr->numChunks = 0; |
| 1852 |
|
|
| 1853 |
|
baseline = fmPtr->ascent; |
| 1854 |
|
maxWidth = 0; |
| 1855 |
|
|
| 1856 |
|
/* |
| 1857 |
|
* Divide the string up into simple strings and measure each string. |
| 1858 |
|
*/ |
| 1859 |
|
|
| 1860 |
|
curX = 0; |
| 1861 |
|
|
| 1862 |
|
end = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(string, numChars); |
| 1863 |
|
special = string; |
| 1864 |
|
|
| 1865 |
|
flags &= TK_IGNORE_TABS | TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES; |
| 1866 |
|
flags |= TK_WHOLE_WORDS | TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
| 1867 |
|
for (start = string; start < end; ) { |
| 1868 |
|
if (start >= special) { |
| 1869 |
|
/* |
| 1870 |
|
* Find the next special character in the string. |
| 1871 |
|
* |
| 1872 |
|
* INTL: Note that it is safe to increment by byte, because we are |
| 1873 |
|
* looking for 7-bit characters that will appear unchanged in |
| 1874 |
|
* UTF-8. At some point we may need to support the full Unicode |
| 1875 |
|
* whitespace set. |
| 1876 |
|
*/ |
| 1877 |
|
|
| 1878 |
|
for (special = start; special < end; special++) { |
| 1879 |
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES)) { |
| 1880 |
|
if ((*special == '\n') || (*special == '\r')) { |
| 1881 |
|
break; |
| 1882 |
|
} |
| 1883 |
|
} |
| 1884 |
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_TABS)) { |
| 1885 |
|
if (*special == '\t') { |
| 1886 |
|
break; |
| 1887 |
|
} |
| 1888 |
|
} |
| 1889 |
|
} |
| 1890 |
|
} |
| 1891 |
|
|
| 1892 |
|
/* |
| 1893 |
|
* Special points at the next special character (or the end of the |
| 1894 |
|
* string). Process characters between start and special. |
| 1895 |
|
*/ |
| 1896 |
|
|
| 1897 |
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
| 1898 |
|
if (start < special) { |
| 1899 |
|
bytesThisChunk = Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, start, special - start, |
| 1900 |
|
wrapLength - curX, flags, &newX); |
| 1901 |
|
newX += curX; |
| 1902 |
|
flags &= ~TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
| 1903 |
|
if (bytesThisChunk > 0) { |
| 1904 |
|
chunkPtr = NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, |
| 1905 |
|
bytesThisChunk, curX, newX, baseline); |
| 1906 |
|
|
| 1907 |
|
start += bytesThisChunk; |
| 1908 |
|
curX = newX; |
| 1909 |
|
} |
| 1910 |
|
} |
| 1911 |
|
|
| 1912 |
|
if ((start == special) && (special < end)) { |
| 1913 |
|
/* |
| 1914 |
|
* Handle the special character. |
| 1915 |
|
* |
| 1916 |
|
* INTL: Special will be pointing at a 7-bit character so we |
| 1917 |
|
* can safely treat it as a single byte. |
| 1918 |
|
*/ |
| 1919 |
|
|
| 1920 |
|
chunkPtr = NULL; |
| 1921 |
|
if (*special == '\t') { |
| 1922 |
|
newX = curX + fontPtr->tabWidth; |
| 1923 |
|
newX -= newX % fontPtr->tabWidth; |
| 1924 |
|
NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 1, curX, newX, |
| 1925 |
|
baseline)->numDisplayChars = -1; |
| 1926 |
|
start++; |
| 1927 |
|
if ((start < end) && |
| 1928 |
|
((wrapLength <= 0) || (newX <= wrapLength))) { |
| 1929 |
|
/* |
| 1930 |
|
* More chars can still fit on this line. |
| 1931 |
|
*/ |
| 1932 |
|
|
| 1933 |
|
curX = newX; |
| 1934 |
|
flags &= ~TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
| 1935 |
|
continue; |
| 1936 |
|
} |
| 1937 |
|
} else { |
| 1938 |
|
NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 1, curX, curX, |
| 1939 |
|
baseline)->numDisplayChars = -1; |
| 1940 |
|
start++; |
| 1941 |
|
goto wrapLine; |
| 1942 |
|
} |
| 1943 |
|
} |
| 1944 |
|
|
| 1945 |
|
/* |
| 1946 |
|
* No more characters are going to go on this line, either because |
| 1947 |
|
* no more characters can fit or there are no more characters left. |
| 1948 |
|
* Consume all extra spaces at end of line. |
| 1949 |
|
*/ |
| 1950 |
|
|
| 1951 |
|
while ((start < end) && isspace(UCHAR(*start))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ |
| 1952 |
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES)) { |
| 1953 |
|
if ((*start == '\n') || (*start == '\r')) { |
| 1954 |
|
break; |
| 1955 |
|
} |
| 1956 |
|
} |
| 1957 |
|
if (!(flags & TK_IGNORE_TABS)) { |
| 1958 |
|
if (*start == '\t') { |
| 1959 |
|
break; |
| 1960 |
|
} |
| 1961 |
|
} |
| 1962 |
|
start++; |
| 1963 |
|
} |
| 1964 |
|
if (chunkPtr != NULL) { |
| 1965 |
|
CONST char *end; |
| 1966 |
|
|
| 1967 |
|
/* |
| 1968 |
|
* Append all the extra spaces on this line to the end of the |
| 1969 |
|
* last text chunk. This is a little tricky because we are |
| 1970 |
|
* switching back and forth between characters and bytes. |
| 1971 |
|
*/ |
| 1972 |
|
|
| 1973 |
|
end = chunkPtr->start + chunkPtr->numBytes; |
| 1974 |
|
bytesThisChunk = start - end; |
| 1975 |
|
if (bytesThisChunk > 0) { |
| 1976 |
|
bytesThisChunk = Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, bytesThisChunk, |
| 1977 |
|
-1, 0, &chunkPtr->totalWidth); |
| 1978 |
|
chunkPtr->numBytes += bytesThisChunk; |
| 1979 |
|
chunkPtr->numChars += Tcl_NumUtfChars(end, bytesThisChunk); |
| 1980 |
|
chunkPtr->totalWidth += curX; |
| 1981 |
|
} |
| 1982 |
|
} |
| 1983 |
|
|
| 1984 |
|
wrapLine: |
| 1985 |
|
flags |= TK_AT_LEAST_ONE; |
| 1986 |
|
|
| 1987 |
|
/* |
| 1988 |
|
* Save current line length, then move current position to start of |
| 1989 |
|
* next line. |
| 1990 |
|
*/ |
| 1991 |
|
|
| 1992 |
|
if (curX > maxWidth) { |
| 1993 |
|
maxWidth = curX; |
| 1994 |
|
} |
| 1995 |
|
|
| 1996 |
|
/* |
| 1997 |
|
* Remember width of this line, so that all chunks on this line |
| 1998 |
|
* can be centered or right justified, if necessary. |
| 1999 |
|
*/ |
| 2000 |
|
|
| 2001 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX)); |
| 2002 |
|
|
| 2003 |
|
curX = 0; |
| 2004 |
|
baseline += height; |
| 2005 |
|
} |
| 2006 |
|
|
| 2007 |
|
/* |
| 2008 |
|
* If last line ends with a newline, then we need to make a 0 width |
| 2009 |
|
* chunk on the next line. Otherwise "Hello" and "Hello\n" are the |
| 2010 |
|
* same height. |
| 2011 |
|
*/ |
| 2012 |
|
|
| 2013 |
|
if ((layoutPtr->numChunks > 0) && ((flags & TK_IGNORE_NEWLINES) == 0)) { |
| 2014 |
|
if (layoutPtr->chunks[layoutPtr->numChunks - 1].start[0] == '\n') { |
| 2015 |
|
chunkPtr = NewChunk(&layoutPtr, &maxChunks, start, 0, curX, |
| 2016 |
|
curX, baseline); |
| 2017 |
|
chunkPtr->numDisplayChars = -1; |
| 2018 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(&lineBuffer, (char *) &curX, sizeof(curX)); |
| 2019 |
|
baseline += height; |
| 2020 |
|
} |
| 2021 |
|
} |
| 2022 |
|
|
| 2023 |
|
layoutPtr->width = maxWidth; |
| 2024 |
|
layoutHeight = baseline - fmPtr->ascent; |
| 2025 |
|
if (layoutPtr->numChunks == 0) { |
| 2026 |
|
layoutHeight = height; |
| 2027 |
|
|
| 2028 |
|
/* |
| 2029 |
|
* This fake chunk is used by the other procedures so that they can |
| 2030 |
|
* pretend that there is a chunk with no chars in it, which makes |
| 2031 |
|
* the coding simpler. |
| 2032 |
|
*/ |
| 2033 |
|
|
| 2034 |
|
layoutPtr->numChunks = 1; |
| 2035 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].start = string; |
| 2036 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].numBytes = 0; |
| 2037 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].numChars = 0; |
| 2038 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].numDisplayChars = -1; |
| 2039 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].x = 0; |
| 2040 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].y = fmPtr->ascent; |
| 2041 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].totalWidth = 0; |
| 2042 |
|
layoutPtr->chunks[0].displayWidth = 0; |
| 2043 |
|
} else { |
| 2044 |
|
/* |
| 2045 |
|
* Using maximum line length, shift all the chunks so that the lines |
| 2046 |
|
* are all justified correctly. |
| 2047 |
|
*/ |
| 2048 |
|
|
| 2049 |
|
curLine = 0; |
| 2050 |
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2051 |
|
y = chunkPtr->y; |
| 2052 |
|
lineLengths = (int *) Tcl_DStringValue(&lineBuffer); |
| 2053 |
|
for (n = 0; n < layoutPtr->numChunks; n++) { |
| 2054 |
|
int extra; |
| 2055 |
|
|
| 2056 |
|
if (chunkPtr->y != y) { |
| 2057 |
|
curLine++; |
| 2058 |
|
y = chunkPtr->y; |
| 2059 |
|
} |
| 2060 |
|
extra = maxWidth - lineLengths[curLine]; |
| 2061 |
|
if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_CENTER) { |
| 2062 |
|
chunkPtr->x += extra / 2; |
| 2063 |
|
} else if (justify == TK_JUSTIFY_RIGHT) { |
| 2064 |
|
chunkPtr->x += extra; |
| 2065 |
|
} |
| 2066 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2067 |
|
} |
| 2068 |
|
} |
| 2069 |
|
|
| 2070 |
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
| 2071 |
|
*widthPtr = layoutPtr->width; |
| 2072 |
|
} |
| 2073 |
|
if (heightPtr != NULL) { |
| 2074 |
|
*heightPtr = layoutHeight; |
| 2075 |
|
} |
| 2076 |
|
Tcl_DStringFree(&lineBuffer); |
| 2077 |
|
|
| 2078 |
|
return (Tk_TextLayout) layoutPtr; |
| 2079 |
|
} |
| 2080 |
|
|
| 2081 |
|
/* |
| 2082 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2083 |
|
* |
| 2084 |
|
* Tk_FreeTextLayout -- |
| 2085 |
|
* |
| 2086 |
|
* This procedure is called to release the storage associated with |
| 2087 |
|
* a Tk_TextLayout when it is no longer needed. |
| 2088 |
|
* |
| 2089 |
|
* Results: |
| 2090 |
|
* None. |
| 2091 |
|
* |
| 2092 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2093 |
|
* Memory is freed. |
| 2094 |
|
* |
| 2095 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2096 |
|
*/ |
| 2097 |
|
|
| 2098 |
|
void |
| 2099 |
|
Tk_FreeTextLayout(textLayout) |
| 2100 |
|
Tk_TextLayout textLayout; /* The text layout to be released. */ |
| 2101 |
|
{ |
| 2102 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2103 |
|
|
| 2104 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) textLayout; |
| 2105 |
|
if (layoutPtr != NULL) { |
| 2106 |
|
ckfree((char *) layoutPtr); |
| 2107 |
|
} |
| 2108 |
|
} |
| 2109 |
|
|
| 2110 |
|
/* |
| 2111 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2112 |
|
* |
| 2113 |
|
* Tk_DrawTextLayout -- |
| 2114 |
|
* |
| 2115 |
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display a |
| 2116 |
|
* multi-line, justified string of text. |
| 2117 |
|
* |
| 2118 |
|
* This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to |
| 2119 |
|
* display single-font, multi-line text and want Tk to handle |
| 2120 |
|
* the details. |
| 2121 |
|
* |
| 2122 |
|
* Results: |
| 2123 |
|
* None. |
| 2124 |
|
* |
| 2125 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2126 |
|
* Text drawn on the screen. |
| 2127 |
|
* |
| 2128 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2129 |
|
*/ |
| 2130 |
|
|
| 2131 |
|
void |
| 2132 |
|
Tk_DrawTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, firstChar, lastChar) |
| 2133 |
|
Display *display; /* Display on which to draw. */ |
| 2134 |
|
Drawable drawable; /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ |
| 2135 |
|
GC gc; /* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */ |
| 2136 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
| 2137 |
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
| 2138 |
|
int x, y; /* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in |
| 2139 |
|
* which to draw (pixels). */ |
| 2140 |
|
int firstChar; /* The index of the first character to draw |
| 2141 |
|
* from the given text item. 0 specfies the |
| 2142 |
|
* beginning. */ |
| 2143 |
|
int lastChar; /* The index just after the last character |
| 2144 |
|
* to draw from the given text item. A number |
| 2145 |
|
* < 0 means to draw all characters. */ |
| 2146 |
|
{ |
| 2147 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2148 |
|
int i, numDisplayChars, drawX; |
| 2149 |
|
CONST char *firstByte; |
| 2150 |
|
CONST char *lastByte; |
| 2151 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 2152 |
|
|
| 2153 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2154 |
|
if (layoutPtr == NULL) { |
| 2155 |
|
return; |
| 2156 |
|
} |
| 2157 |
|
|
| 2158 |
|
if (lastChar < 0) { |
| 2159 |
|
lastChar = 100000000; |
| 2160 |
|
} |
| 2161 |
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2162 |
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
| 2163 |
|
numDisplayChars = chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; |
| 2164 |
|
if ((numDisplayChars > 0) && (firstChar < numDisplayChars)) { |
| 2165 |
|
if (firstChar <= 0) { |
| 2166 |
|
drawX = 0; |
| 2167 |
|
firstChar = 0; |
| 2168 |
|
firstByte = chunkPtr->start; |
| 2169 |
|
} else { |
| 2170 |
|
firstByte = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, firstChar); |
| 2171 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars(layoutPtr->tkfont, chunkPtr->start, |
| 2172 |
|
firstByte - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &drawX); |
| 2173 |
|
} |
| 2174 |
|
if (lastChar < numDisplayChars) { |
| 2175 |
|
numDisplayChars = lastChar; |
| 2176 |
|
} |
| 2177 |
|
lastByte = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, numDisplayChars); |
| 2178 |
|
Tk_DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, layoutPtr->tkfont, |
| 2179 |
|
firstByte, lastByte - firstByte, |
| 2180 |
|
x + chunkPtr->x + drawX, y + chunkPtr->y); |
| 2181 |
|
} |
| 2182 |
|
firstChar -= chunkPtr->numChars; |
| 2183 |
|
lastChar -= chunkPtr->numChars; |
| 2184 |
|
if (lastChar <= 0) { |
| 2185 |
|
break; |
| 2186 |
|
} |
| 2187 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2188 |
|
} |
| 2189 |
|
} |
| 2190 |
|
|
| 2191 |
|
/* |
| 2192 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2193 |
|
* |
| 2194 |
|
* Tk_UnderlineTextLayout -- |
| 2195 |
|
* |
| 2196 |
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to display an |
| 2197 |
|
* underline below an individual character. This procedure does |
| 2198 |
|
* not draw the text, just the underline. |
| 2199 |
|
* |
| 2200 |
|
* This procedure is useful for simple widgets that need to |
| 2201 |
|
* display single-font, multi-line text with an individual |
| 2202 |
|
* character underlined and want Tk to handle the details. |
| 2203 |
|
* To display larger amounts of underlined text, construct |
| 2204 |
|
* and use an underlined font. |
| 2205 |
|
* |
| 2206 |
|
* Results: |
| 2207 |
|
* None. |
| 2208 |
|
* |
| 2209 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2210 |
|
* Underline drawn on the screen. |
| 2211 |
|
* |
| 2212 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2213 |
|
*/ |
| 2214 |
|
|
| 2215 |
|
void |
| 2216 |
|
Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(display, drawable, gc, layout, x, y, underline) |
| 2217 |
|
Display *display; /* Display on which to draw. */ |
| 2218 |
|
Drawable drawable; /* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */ |
| 2219 |
|
GC gc; /* Graphics context to use for drawing text. */ |
| 2220 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
| 2221 |
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
| 2222 |
|
int x, y; /* Upper-left hand corner of rectangle in |
| 2223 |
|
* which to draw (pixels). */ |
| 2224 |
|
int underline; /* Index of the single character to |
| 2225 |
|
* underline, or -1 for no underline. */ |
| 2226 |
|
{ |
| 2227 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2228 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 2229 |
|
int xx, yy, width, height; |
| 2230 |
|
|
| 2231 |
|
if ((Tk_CharBbox(layout, underline, &xx, &yy, &width, &height) != 0) |
| 2232 |
|
&& (width != 0)) { |
| 2233 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2234 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
| 2235 |
|
|
| 2236 |
|
XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x + xx, |
| 2237 |
|
y + yy + fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->underlinePos, |
| 2238 |
|
(unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) fontPtr->underlineHeight); |
| 2239 |
|
} |
| 2240 |
|
} |
| 2241 |
|
|
| 2242 |
|
/* |
| 2243 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2244 |
|
* |
| 2245 |
|
* Tk_PointToChar -- |
| 2246 |
|
* |
| 2247 |
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to determine the |
| 2248 |
|
* character closest to the given point. The point must be |
| 2249 |
|
* specified with respect to the upper-left hand corner of the |
| 2250 |
|
* text layout, which is considered to be located at (0, 0). |
| 2251 |
|
* |
| 2252 |
|
* Any point whose y-value is less that 0 will be considered closest |
| 2253 |
|
* to the first character in the text layout; any point whose y-value |
| 2254 |
|
* is greater than the height of the text layout will be considered |
| 2255 |
|
* closest to the last character in the text layout. |
| 2256 |
|
* |
| 2257 |
|
* Any point whose x-value is less than 0 will be considered closest |
| 2258 |
|
* to the first character on that line; any point whose x-value is |
| 2259 |
|
* greater than the width of the text layout will be considered |
| 2260 |
|
* closest to the last character on that line. |
| 2261 |
|
* |
| 2262 |
|
* Results: |
| 2263 |
|
* The return value is the index of the character that was |
| 2264 |
|
* closest to the point. Given a text layout with no characters, |
| 2265 |
|
* the value 0 will always be returned, referring to a hypothetical |
| 2266 |
|
* zero-width placeholder character. |
| 2267 |
|
* |
| 2268 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2269 |
|
* None. |
| 2270 |
|
* |
| 2271 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2272 |
|
*/ |
| 2273 |
|
|
| 2274 |
|
int |
| 2275 |
|
Tk_PointToChar(layout, x, y) |
| 2276 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
| 2277 |
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
| 2278 |
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates of point to check, with |
| 2279 |
|
* respect to the upper-left corner of the |
| 2280 |
|
* text layout. */ |
| 2281 |
|
{ |
| 2282 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2283 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr, *lastPtr; |
| 2284 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 2285 |
|
int i, n, dummy, baseline, pos, numChars; |
| 2286 |
|
|
| 2287 |
|
if (y < 0) { |
| 2288 |
|
/* |
| 2289 |
|
* Point lies above any line in this layout. Return the index of |
| 2290 |
|
* the first char. |
| 2291 |
|
*/ |
| 2292 |
|
|
| 2293 |
|
return 0; |
| 2294 |
|
} |
| 2295 |
|
|
| 2296 |
|
/* |
| 2297 |
|
* Find which line contains the point. |
| 2298 |
|
*/ |
| 2299 |
|
|
| 2300 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2301 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
| 2302 |
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2303 |
|
numChars = 0; |
| 2304 |
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
| 2305 |
|
baseline = chunkPtr->y; |
| 2306 |
|
if (y < baseline + fontPtr->fm.descent) { |
| 2307 |
|
if (x < chunkPtr->x) { |
| 2308 |
|
/* |
| 2309 |
|
* Point is to the left of all chunks on this line. Return |
| 2310 |
|
* the index of the first character on this line. |
| 2311 |
|
*/ |
| 2312 |
|
|
| 2313 |
|
return numChars; |
| 2314 |
|
} |
| 2315 |
|
if (x >= layoutPtr->width) { |
| 2316 |
|
/* |
| 2317 |
|
* If point lies off right side of the text layout, return |
| 2318 |
|
* the last char in the last chunk on this line. Without |
| 2319 |
|
* this, it might return the index of the first char that |
| 2320 |
|
* was located outside of the text layout. |
| 2321 |
|
*/ |
| 2322 |
|
|
| 2323 |
|
x = INT_MAX; |
| 2324 |
|
} |
| 2325 |
|
|
| 2326 |
|
/* |
| 2327 |
|
* Examine all chunks on this line to see which one contains |
| 2328 |
|
* the specified point. |
| 2329 |
|
*/ |
| 2330 |
|
|
| 2331 |
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 2332 |
|
while ((i < layoutPtr->numChunks) && (chunkPtr->y == baseline)) { |
| 2333 |
|
if (x < chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth) { |
| 2334 |
|
/* |
| 2335 |
|
* Point falls on one of the characters in this chunk. |
| 2336 |
|
*/ |
| 2337 |
|
|
| 2338 |
|
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) { |
| 2339 |
|
/* |
| 2340 |
|
* This is a special chunk that encapsulates a single |
| 2341 |
|
* tab or newline char. |
| 2342 |
|
*/ |
| 2343 |
|
|
| 2344 |
|
return numChars; |
| 2345 |
|
} |
| 2346 |
|
n = Tk_MeasureChars((Tk_Font) fontPtr, chunkPtr->start, |
| 2347 |
|
chunkPtr->numBytes, x - chunkPtr->x, |
| 2348 |
|
0, &dummy); |
| 2349 |
|
return numChars + Tcl_NumUtfChars(chunkPtr->start, n); |
| 2350 |
|
} |
| 2351 |
|
numChars += chunkPtr->numChars; |
| 2352 |
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 2353 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2354 |
|
i++; |
| 2355 |
|
} |
| 2356 |
|
|
| 2357 |
|
/* |
| 2358 |
|
* Point is to the right of all chars in all the chunks on this |
| 2359 |
|
* line. Return the index just past the last char in the last |
| 2360 |
|
* chunk on this line. |
| 2361 |
|
*/ |
| 2362 |
|
|
| 2363 |
|
pos = numChars; |
| 2364 |
|
if (i < layoutPtr->numChunks) { |
| 2365 |
|
pos--; |
| 2366 |
|
} |
| 2367 |
|
return pos; |
| 2368 |
|
} |
| 2369 |
|
numChars += chunkPtr->numChars; |
| 2370 |
|
lastPtr = chunkPtr; |
| 2371 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2372 |
|
} |
| 2373 |
|
|
| 2374 |
|
/* |
| 2375 |
|
* Point lies below any line in this text layout. Return the index |
| 2376 |
|
* just past the last char. |
| 2377 |
|
*/ |
| 2378 |
|
|
| 2379 |
|
return (lastPtr->start + lastPtr->numChars) - layoutPtr->string; |
| 2380 |
|
} |
| 2381 |
|
|
| 2382 |
|
/* |
| 2383 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2384 |
|
* |
| 2385 |
|
* Tk_CharBbox -- |
| 2386 |
|
* |
| 2387 |
|
* Use the information in the Tk_TextLayout token to return the |
| 2388 |
|
* bounding box for the character specified by index. |
| 2389 |
|
* |
| 2390 |
|
* The width of the bounding box is the advance width of the |
| 2391 |
|
* character, and does not include and left- or right-bearing. |
| 2392 |
|
* Any character that extends partially outside of the |
| 2393 |
|
* text layout is considered to be truncated at the edge. Any |
| 2394 |
|
* character which is located completely outside of the text |
| 2395 |
|
* layout is considered to be zero-width and pegged against |
| 2396 |
|
* the edge. |
| 2397 |
|
* |
| 2398 |
|
* The height of the bounding box is the line height for this font, |
| 2399 |
|
* extending from the top of the ascent to the bottom of the |
| 2400 |
|
* descent. Information about the actual height of the individual |
| 2401 |
|
* letter is not available. |
| 2402 |
|
* |
| 2403 |
|
* A text layout that contains no characters is considered to |
| 2404 |
|
* contain a single zero-width placeholder character. |
| 2405 |
|
* |
| 2406 |
|
* Results: |
| 2407 |
|
* The return value is 0 if the index did not specify a character |
| 2408 |
|
* in the text layout, or non-zero otherwise. In that case, |
| 2409 |
|
* *bbox is filled with the bounding box of the character. |
| 2410 |
|
* |
| 2411 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2412 |
|
* None. |
| 2413 |
|
* |
| 2414 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2415 |
|
*/ |
| 2416 |
|
|
| 2417 |
|
int |
| 2418 |
|
Tk_CharBbox(layout, index, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr) |
| 2419 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call to |
| 2420 |
|
* Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
| 2421 |
|
int index; /* The index of the character whose bbox is |
| 2422 |
|
* desired. */ |
| 2423 |
|
int *xPtr, *yPtr; /* Filled with the upper-left hand corner, in |
| 2424 |
|
* pixels, of the bounding box for the character |
| 2425 |
|
* specified by index, if non-NULL. */ |
| 2426 |
|
int *widthPtr, *heightPtr; |
| 2427 |
|
/* Filled with the width and height of the |
| 2428 |
|
* bounding box for the character specified by |
| 2429 |
|
* index, if non-NULL. */ |
| 2430 |
|
{ |
| 2431 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2432 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 2433 |
|
int i, x, w; |
| 2434 |
|
Tk_Font tkfont; |
| 2435 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 2436 |
|
CONST char *end; |
| 2437 |
|
|
| 2438 |
|
if (index < 0) { |
| 2439 |
|
return 0; |
| 2440 |
|
} |
| 2441 |
|
|
| 2442 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2443 |
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2444 |
|
tkfont = layoutPtr->tkfont; |
| 2445 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) tkfont; |
| 2446 |
|
|
| 2447 |
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
| 2448 |
|
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars < 0) { |
| 2449 |
|
if (index == 0) { |
| 2450 |
|
x = chunkPtr->x; |
| 2451 |
|
w = chunkPtr->totalWidth; |
| 2452 |
|
goto check; |
| 2453 |
|
} |
| 2454 |
|
} else if (index < chunkPtr->numChars) { |
| 2455 |
|
end = Tcl_UtfAtIndex(chunkPtr->start, index); |
| 2456 |
|
if (xPtr != NULL) { |
| 2457 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, chunkPtr->start, |
| 2458 |
|
end - chunkPtr->start, -1, 0, &x); |
| 2459 |
|
x += chunkPtr->x; |
| 2460 |
|
} |
| 2461 |
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
| 2462 |
|
Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, end, Tcl_UtfNext(end) - end, |
| 2463 |
|
-1, 0, &w); |
| 2464 |
|
} |
| 2465 |
|
goto check; |
| 2466 |
|
} |
| 2467 |
|
index -= chunkPtr->numChars; |
| 2468 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2469 |
|
} |
| 2470 |
|
if (index == 0) { |
| 2471 |
|
/* |
| 2472 |
|
* Special case to get location just past last char in layout. |
| 2473 |
|
*/ |
| 2474 |
|
|
| 2475 |
|
chunkPtr--; |
| 2476 |
|
x = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->totalWidth; |
| 2477 |
|
w = 0; |
| 2478 |
|
} else { |
| 2479 |
|
return 0; |
| 2480 |
|
} |
| 2481 |
|
|
| 2482 |
|
/* |
| 2483 |
|
* Ensure that the bbox lies within the text layout. This forces all |
| 2484 |
|
* chars that extend off the right edge of the text layout to have |
| 2485 |
|
* truncated widths, and all chars that are completely off the right |
| 2486 |
|
* edge of the text layout to peg to the edge and have 0 width. |
| 2487 |
|
*/ |
| 2488 |
|
check: |
| 2489 |
|
if (yPtr != NULL) { |
| 2490 |
|
*yPtr = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
| 2491 |
|
} |
| 2492 |
|
if (heightPtr != NULL) { |
| 2493 |
|
*heightPtr = fontPtr->fm.ascent + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
| 2494 |
|
} |
| 2495 |
|
|
| 2496 |
|
if (x > layoutPtr->width) { |
| 2497 |
|
x = layoutPtr->width; |
| 2498 |
|
} |
| 2499 |
|
if (xPtr != NULL) { |
| 2500 |
|
*xPtr = x; |
| 2501 |
|
} |
| 2502 |
|
if (widthPtr != NULL) { |
| 2503 |
|
if (x + w > layoutPtr->width) { |
| 2504 |
|
w = layoutPtr->width - x; |
| 2505 |
|
} |
| 2506 |
|
*widthPtr = w; |
| 2507 |
|
} |
| 2508 |
|
|
| 2509 |
|
return 1; |
| 2510 |
|
} |
| 2511 |
|
|
| 2512 |
|
/* |
| 2513 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2514 |
|
* |
| 2515 |
|
* Tk_DistanceToTextLayout -- |
| 2516 |
|
* |
| 2517 |
|
* Computes the distance in pixels from the given point to the |
| 2518 |
|
* given text layout. Non-displaying space characters that occur |
| 2519 |
|
* at the end of individual lines in the text layout are ignored |
| 2520 |
|
* for hit detection purposes. |
| 2521 |
|
* |
| 2522 |
|
* Results: |
| 2523 |
|
* The return value is 0 if the point (x, y) is inside the text |
| 2524 |
|
* layout. If the point isn't inside the text layout then the |
| 2525 |
|
* return value is the distance in pixels from the point to the |
| 2526 |
|
* text item. |
| 2527 |
|
* |
| 2528 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2529 |
|
* None. |
| 2530 |
|
* |
| 2531 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2532 |
|
*/ |
| 2533 |
|
|
| 2534 |
|
int |
| 2535 |
|
Tk_DistanceToTextLayout(layout, x, y) |
| 2536 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
| 2537 |
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
| 2538 |
|
int x, y; /* Coordinates of point to check, with |
| 2539 |
|
* respect to the upper-left corner of the |
| 2540 |
|
* text layout (in pixels). */ |
| 2541 |
|
{ |
| 2542 |
|
int i, x1, x2, y1, y2, xDiff, yDiff, dist, minDist, ascent, descent; |
| 2543 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 2544 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2545 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 2546 |
|
|
| 2547 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2548 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
| 2549 |
|
ascent = fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
| 2550 |
|
descent = fontPtr->fm.descent; |
| 2551 |
|
|
| 2552 |
|
minDist = 0; |
| 2553 |
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2554 |
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
| 2555 |
|
if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\n') { |
| 2556 |
|
/* |
| 2557 |
|
* Newline characters are not counted when computing distance |
| 2558 |
|
* (but tab characters would still be considered). |
| 2559 |
|
*/ |
| 2560 |
|
|
| 2561 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2562 |
|
continue; |
| 2563 |
|
} |
| 2564 |
|
|
| 2565 |
|
x1 = chunkPtr->x; |
| 2566 |
|
y1 = chunkPtr->y - ascent; |
| 2567 |
|
x2 = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->displayWidth; |
| 2568 |
|
y2 = chunkPtr->y + descent; |
| 2569 |
|
|
| 2570 |
|
if (x < x1) { |
| 2571 |
|
xDiff = x1 - x; |
| 2572 |
|
} else if (x >= x2) { |
| 2573 |
|
xDiff = x - x2 + 1; |
| 2574 |
|
} else { |
| 2575 |
|
xDiff = 0; |
| 2576 |
|
} |
| 2577 |
|
|
| 2578 |
|
if (y < y1) { |
| 2579 |
|
yDiff = y1 - y; |
| 2580 |
|
} else if (y >= y2) { |
| 2581 |
|
yDiff = y - y2 + 1; |
| 2582 |
|
} else { |
| 2583 |
|
yDiff = 0; |
| 2584 |
|
} |
| 2585 |
|
if ((xDiff == 0) && (yDiff == 0)) { |
| 2586 |
|
return 0; |
| 2587 |
|
} |
| 2588 |
|
dist = (int) hypot((double) xDiff, (double) yDiff); |
| 2589 |
|
if ((dist < minDist) || (minDist == 0)) { |
| 2590 |
|
minDist = dist; |
| 2591 |
|
} |
| 2592 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2593 |
|
} |
| 2594 |
|
return minDist; |
| 2595 |
|
} |
| 2596 |
|
|
| 2597 |
|
/* |
| 2598 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2599 |
|
* |
| 2600 |
|
* Tk_IntersectTextLayout -- |
| 2601 |
|
* |
| 2602 |
|
* Determines whether a text layout lies entirely inside, |
| 2603 |
|
* entirely outside, or overlaps a given rectangle. Non-displaying |
| 2604 |
|
* space characters that occur at the end of individual lines in |
| 2605 |
|
* the text layout are ignored for intersection calculations. |
| 2606 |
|
* |
| 2607 |
|
* Results: |
| 2608 |
|
* The return value is -1 if the text layout is entirely outside of |
| 2609 |
|
* the rectangle, 0 if it overlaps, and 1 if it is entirely inside |
| 2610 |
|
* of the rectangle. |
| 2611 |
|
* |
| 2612 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2613 |
|
* None. |
| 2614 |
|
* |
| 2615 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2616 |
|
*/ |
| 2617 |
|
|
| 2618 |
|
int |
| 2619 |
|
Tk_IntersectTextLayout(layout, x, y, width, height) |
| 2620 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* Layout information, from a previous call |
| 2621 |
|
* to Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). */ |
| 2622 |
|
int x, y; /* Upper-left hand corner, in pixels, of |
| 2623 |
|
* rectangular area to compare with text |
| 2624 |
|
* layout. Coordinates are with respect to |
| 2625 |
|
* the upper-left hand corner of the text |
| 2626 |
|
* layout itself. */ |
| 2627 |
|
int width, height; /* The width and height of the above |
| 2628 |
|
* rectangular area, in pixels. */ |
| 2629 |
|
{ |
| 2630 |
|
int result, i, x1, y1, x2, y2; |
| 2631 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2632 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 2633 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 2634 |
|
int left, top, right, bottom; |
| 2635 |
|
|
| 2636 |
|
/* |
| 2637 |
|
* Scan the chunks one at a time, seeing whether each is entirely in, |
| 2638 |
|
* entirely out, or overlapping the rectangle. If an overlap is |
| 2639 |
|
* detected, return immediately; otherwise wait until all chunks have |
| 2640 |
|
* been processed and see if they were all inside or all outside. |
| 2641 |
|
*/ |
| 2642 |
|
|
| 2643 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2644 |
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2645 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) layoutPtr->tkfont; |
| 2646 |
|
|
| 2647 |
|
left = x; |
| 2648 |
|
top = y; |
| 2649 |
|
right = x + width; |
| 2650 |
|
bottom = y + height; |
| 2651 |
|
|
| 2652 |
|
result = 0; |
| 2653 |
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
| 2654 |
|
if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\n') { |
| 2655 |
|
/* |
| 2656 |
|
* Newline characters are not counted when computing area |
| 2657 |
|
* intersection (but tab characters would still be considered). |
| 2658 |
|
*/ |
| 2659 |
|
|
| 2660 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2661 |
|
continue; |
| 2662 |
|
} |
| 2663 |
|
|
| 2664 |
|
x1 = chunkPtr->x; |
| 2665 |
|
y1 = chunkPtr->y - fontPtr->fm.ascent; |
| 2666 |
|
x2 = chunkPtr->x + chunkPtr->displayWidth; |
| 2667 |
|
y2 = chunkPtr->y + fontPtr->fm.descent; |
| 2668 |
|
|
| 2669 |
|
if ((right < x1) || (left >= x2) |
| 2670 |
|
|| (bottom < y1) || (top >= y2)) { |
| 2671 |
|
if (result == 1) { |
| 2672 |
|
return 0; |
| 2673 |
|
} |
| 2674 |
|
result = -1; |
| 2675 |
|
} else if ((x1 < left) || (x2 >= right) |
| 2676 |
|
|| (y1 < top) || (y2 >= bottom)) { |
| 2677 |
|
return 0; |
| 2678 |
|
} else if (result == -1) { |
| 2679 |
|
return 0; |
| 2680 |
|
} else { |
| 2681 |
|
result = 1; |
| 2682 |
|
} |
| 2683 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2684 |
|
} |
| 2685 |
|
return result; |
| 2686 |
|
} |
| 2687 |
|
|
| 2688 |
|
/* |
| 2689 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2690 |
|
* |
| 2691 |
|
* Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript -- |
| 2692 |
|
* |
| 2693 |
|
* Outputs the contents of a text layout in Postscript format. |
| 2694 |
|
* The set of lines in the text layout will be rendered by the user |
| 2695 |
|
* supplied Postscript function. The function should be of the form: |
| 2696 |
|
* |
| 2697 |
|
* justify x y string function -- |
| 2698 |
|
* |
| 2699 |
|
* Justify is -1, 0, or 1, depending on whether the following string |
| 2700 |
|
* should be left, center, or right justified, x and y is the |
| 2701 |
|
* location for the origin of the string, string is the sequence |
| 2702 |
|
* of characters to be printed, and function is the name of the |
| 2703 |
|
* caller-provided function; the function should leave nothing |
| 2704 |
|
* on the stack. |
| 2705 |
|
* |
| 2706 |
|
* The meaning of the origin of the string (x and y) depends on |
| 2707 |
|
* the justification. For left justification, x is where the |
| 2708 |
|
* left edge of the string should appear. For center justification, |
| 2709 |
|
* x is where the center of the string should appear. And for right |
| 2710 |
|
* justification, x is where the right edge of the string should |
| 2711 |
|
* appear. This behavior is necessary because, for example, right |
| 2712 |
|
* justified text on the screen is justified with screen metrics. |
| 2713 |
|
* The same string needs to be justified with printer metrics on |
| 2714 |
|
* the printer to appear in the correct place with respect to other |
| 2715 |
|
* similarly justified strings. In all circumstances, y is the |
| 2716 |
|
* location of the baseline for the string. |
| 2717 |
|
* |
| 2718 |
|
* Results: |
| 2719 |
|
* The interp's result is modified to hold the Postscript code that |
| 2720 |
|
* will render the text layout. |
| 2721 |
|
* |
| 2722 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2723 |
|
* None. |
| 2724 |
|
* |
| 2725 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2726 |
|
*/ |
| 2727 |
|
|
| 2728 |
|
void |
| 2729 |
|
Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript(interp, layout) |
| 2730 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Filled with Postscript code. */ |
| 2731 |
|
Tk_TextLayout layout; /* The layout to be rendered. */ |
| 2732 |
|
{ |
| 2733 |
|
#define MAXUSE 128 |
| 2734 |
|
char buf[MAXUSE+10]; |
| 2735 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 2736 |
|
int i, j, used, c, baseline; |
| 2737 |
|
Tcl_UniChar ch; |
| 2738 |
|
CONST char *p; |
| 2739 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 2740 |
|
|
| 2741 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) layout; |
| 2742 |
|
chunkPtr = layoutPtr->chunks; |
| 2743 |
|
baseline = chunkPtr->y; |
| 2744 |
|
used = 0; |
| 2745 |
|
buf[used++] = '('; |
| 2746 |
|
for (i = 0; i < layoutPtr->numChunks; i++) { |
| 2747 |
|
if (baseline != chunkPtr->y) { |
| 2748 |
|
buf[used++] = ')'; |
| 2749 |
|
buf[used++] = '\n'; |
| 2750 |
|
buf[used++] = '('; |
| 2751 |
|
baseline = chunkPtr->y; |
| 2752 |
|
} |
| 2753 |
|
if (chunkPtr->numDisplayChars <= 0) { |
| 2754 |
|
if (chunkPtr->start[0] == '\t') { |
| 2755 |
|
buf[used++] = '\\'; |
| 2756 |
|
buf[used++] = 't'; |
| 2757 |
|
} |
| 2758 |
|
} else { |
| 2759 |
|
p = chunkPtr->start; |
| 2760 |
|
for (j = 0; j < chunkPtr->numDisplayChars; j++) { |
| 2761 |
|
/* |
| 2762 |
|
* INTL: For now we just treat the characters as binary |
| 2763 |
|
* data and display the lower byte. Eventually this should |
| 2764 |
|
* be revised to handle international postscript fonts. |
| 2765 |
|
*/ |
| 2766 |
|
|
| 2767 |
|
p += Tcl_UtfToUniChar(p, &ch); |
| 2768 |
|
c = UCHAR(ch & 0xff); |
| 2769 |
|
if ((c == '(') || (c == ')') || (c == '\\') || (c < 0x20) |
| 2770 |
|
|| (c >= UCHAR(0x7f))) { |
| 2771 |
|
/* |
| 2772 |
|
* Tricky point: the "03" is necessary in the sprintf |
| 2773 |
|
* below, so that a full three digits of octal are |
| 2774 |
|
* always generated. Without the "03", a number |
| 2775 |
|
* following this sequence could be interpreted by |
| 2776 |
|
* Postscript as part of this sequence. |
| 2777 |
|
*/ |
| 2778 |
|
|
| 2779 |
|
sprintf(buf + used, "\\%03o", c); |
| 2780 |
|
used += 4; |
| 2781 |
|
} else { |
| 2782 |
|
buf[used++] = c; |
| 2783 |
|
} |
| 2784 |
|
if (used >= MAXUSE) { |
| 2785 |
|
buf[used] = '\0'; |
| 2786 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL); |
| 2787 |
|
used = 0; |
| 2788 |
|
} |
| 2789 |
|
} |
| 2790 |
|
} |
| 2791 |
|
if (used >= MAXUSE) { |
| 2792 |
|
/* |
| 2793 |
|
* If there are a whole bunch of returns or tabs in a row, |
| 2794 |
|
* then buf[] could get filled up. |
| 2795 |
|
*/ |
| 2796 |
|
|
| 2797 |
|
buf[used] = '\0'; |
| 2798 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL); |
| 2799 |
|
used = 0; |
| 2800 |
|
} |
| 2801 |
|
chunkPtr++; |
| 2802 |
|
} |
| 2803 |
|
buf[used++] = ')'; |
| 2804 |
|
buf[used++] = '\n'; |
| 2805 |
|
buf[used] = '\0'; |
| 2806 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buf, (char *) NULL); |
| 2807 |
|
} |
| 2808 |
|
|
| 2809 |
|
/* |
| 2810 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2811 |
|
* |
| 2812 |
|
* ConfigAttributesObj -- |
| 2813 |
|
* |
| 2814 |
|
* Process command line options to fill in fields of a properly |
| 2815 |
|
* initialized font attributes structure. |
| 2816 |
|
* |
| 2817 |
|
* Results: |
| 2818 |
|
* A standard Tcl return value. If TCL_ERROR is returned, an |
| 2819 |
|
* error message will be left in interp's result object. |
| 2820 |
|
* |
| 2821 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2822 |
|
* The fields of the font attributes structure get filled in with |
| 2823 |
|
* information from argc/argv. If an error occurs while parsing, |
| 2824 |
|
* the font attributes structure will contain all modifications |
| 2825 |
|
* specified in the command line options up to the point of the |
| 2826 |
|
* error. |
| 2827 |
|
* |
| 2828 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2829 |
|
*/ |
| 2830 |
|
|
| 2831 |
|
static int |
| 2832 |
|
ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr) |
| 2833 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for error return. */ |
| 2834 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For display on which font will be used. */ |
| 2835 |
|
int objc; /* Number of elements in argv. */ |
| 2836 |
|
Tcl_Obj *CONST objv[]; /* Command line options. */ |
| 2837 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Font attributes structure whose fields |
| 2838 |
|
* are to be modified. Structure must already |
| 2839 |
|
* be properly initialized. */ |
| 2840 |
|
{ |
| 2841 |
|
int i, n, index; |
| 2842 |
|
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr; |
| 2843 |
|
char *value; |
| 2844 |
|
|
| 2845 |
|
for (i = 0; i < objc; i += 2) { |
| 2846 |
|
optionPtr = objv[i]; |
| 2847 |
|
valuePtr = objv[i + 1]; |
| 2848 |
|
|
| 2849 |
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, optionPtr, fontOpt, "option", 1, |
| 2850 |
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
| 2851 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2852 |
|
} |
| 2853 |
|
if ((i+2 >= objc) && (objc & 1)) { |
| 2854 |
|
/* |
| 2855 |
|
* This test occurs after Tcl_GetIndexFromObj() so that |
| 2856 |
|
* "font create xyz -xyz" will return the error message |
| 2857 |
|
* that "-xyz" is a bad option, rather than that the value |
| 2858 |
|
* for "-xyz" is missing. |
| 2859 |
|
*/ |
| 2860 |
|
|
| 2861 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "value for \"", |
| 2862 |
|
Tcl_GetString(optionPtr), "\" option missing", |
| 2863 |
|
(char *) NULL); |
| 2864 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2865 |
|
} |
| 2866 |
|
|
| 2867 |
|
switch (index) { |
| 2868 |
|
case FONT_FAMILY: { |
| 2869 |
|
value = Tcl_GetString(valuePtr); |
| 2870 |
|
faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(value); |
| 2871 |
|
break; |
| 2872 |
|
} |
| 2873 |
|
case FONT_SIZE: { |
| 2874 |
|
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { |
| 2875 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2876 |
|
} |
| 2877 |
|
faPtr->size = n; |
| 2878 |
|
break; |
| 2879 |
|
} |
| 2880 |
|
case FONT_WEIGHT: { |
| 2881 |
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, weightMap, valuePtr); |
| 2882 |
|
if (n == TK_FW_UNKNOWN) { |
| 2883 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2884 |
|
} |
| 2885 |
|
faPtr->weight = n; |
| 2886 |
|
break; |
| 2887 |
|
} |
| 2888 |
|
case FONT_SLANT: { |
| 2889 |
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(interp, optionPtr, slantMap, valuePtr); |
| 2890 |
|
if (n == TK_FS_UNKNOWN) { |
| 2891 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2892 |
|
} |
| 2893 |
|
faPtr->slant = n; |
| 2894 |
|
break; |
| 2895 |
|
} |
| 2896 |
|
case FONT_UNDERLINE: { |
| 2897 |
|
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { |
| 2898 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2899 |
|
} |
| 2900 |
|
faPtr->underline = n; |
| 2901 |
|
break; |
| 2902 |
|
} |
| 2903 |
|
case FONT_OVERSTRIKE: { |
| 2904 |
|
if (Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj(interp, valuePtr, &n) != TCL_OK) { |
| 2905 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2906 |
|
} |
| 2907 |
|
faPtr->overstrike = n; |
| 2908 |
|
break; |
| 2909 |
|
} |
| 2910 |
|
} |
| 2911 |
|
} |
| 2912 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 2913 |
|
} |
| 2914 |
|
|
| 2915 |
|
/* |
| 2916 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2917 |
|
* |
| 2918 |
|
* GetAttributeInfoObj -- |
| 2919 |
|
* |
| 2920 |
|
* Return information about the font attributes as a Tcl list. |
| 2921 |
|
* |
| 2922 |
|
* Results: |
| 2923 |
|
* The return value is TCL_OK if the objPtr was non-NULL and |
| 2924 |
|
* specified a valid font attribute, TCL_ERROR otherwise. If TCL_OK |
| 2925 |
|
* is returned, the interp's result object is modified to hold a |
| 2926 |
|
* description of either the current value of a single option, or a |
| 2927 |
|
* list of all options and their current values for the given font |
| 2928 |
|
* attributes. If TCL_ERROR is returned, the interp's result is |
| 2929 |
|
* set to an error message describing that the objPtr did not refer |
| 2930 |
|
* to a valid option. |
| 2931 |
|
* |
| 2932 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 2933 |
|
* None. |
| 2934 |
|
* |
| 2935 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 2936 |
|
*/ |
| 2937 |
|
|
| 2938 |
|
static int |
| 2939 |
|
GetAttributeInfoObj(interp, faPtr, objPtr) |
| 2940 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp to hold result. */ |
| 2941 |
|
CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* The font attributes to inspect. */ |
| 2942 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* If non-NULL, indicates the single |
| 2943 |
|
* option whose value is to be |
| 2944 |
|
* returned. Otherwise information is |
| 2945 |
|
* returned for all options. */ |
| 2946 |
|
{ |
| 2947 |
|
int i, index, start, end; |
| 2948 |
|
char *str; |
| 2949 |
|
Tcl_Obj *optionPtr, *valuePtr, *resultPtr; |
| 2950 |
|
|
| 2951 |
|
resultPtr = Tcl_GetObjResult(interp); |
| 2952 |
|
|
| 2953 |
|
start = 0; |
| 2954 |
|
end = FONT_NUMFIELDS; |
| 2955 |
|
if (objPtr != NULL) { |
| 2956 |
|
if (Tcl_GetIndexFromObj(interp, objPtr, fontOpt, "option", TCL_EXACT, |
| 2957 |
|
&index) != TCL_OK) { |
| 2958 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 2959 |
|
} |
| 2960 |
|
start = index; |
| 2961 |
|
end = index + 1; |
| 2962 |
|
} |
| 2963 |
|
|
| 2964 |
|
valuePtr = NULL; |
| 2965 |
|
for (i = start; i < end; i++) { |
| 2966 |
|
switch (i) { |
| 2967 |
|
case FONT_FAMILY: |
| 2968 |
|
str = faPtr->family; |
| 2969 |
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, ((str == NULL) ? 0 : -1)); |
| 2970 |
|
break; |
| 2971 |
|
|
| 2972 |
|
case FONT_SIZE: |
| 2973 |
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewIntObj(faPtr->size); |
| 2974 |
|
break; |
| 2975 |
|
|
| 2976 |
|
case FONT_WEIGHT: |
| 2977 |
|
str = TkFindStateString(weightMap, faPtr->weight); |
| 2978 |
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1); |
| 2979 |
|
break; |
| 2980 |
|
|
| 2981 |
|
case FONT_SLANT: |
| 2982 |
|
str = TkFindStateString(slantMap, faPtr->slant); |
| 2983 |
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(str, -1); |
| 2984 |
|
break; |
| 2985 |
|
|
| 2986 |
|
case FONT_UNDERLINE: |
| 2987 |
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->underline); |
| 2988 |
|
break; |
| 2989 |
|
|
| 2990 |
|
case FONT_OVERSTRIKE: |
| 2991 |
|
valuePtr = Tcl_NewBooleanObj(faPtr->overstrike); |
| 2992 |
|
break; |
| 2993 |
|
} |
| 2994 |
|
if (objPtr != NULL) { |
| 2995 |
|
Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, valuePtr); |
| 2996 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 2997 |
|
} |
| 2998 |
|
optionPtr = Tcl_NewStringObj(fontOpt[i], -1); |
| 2999 |
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, optionPtr); |
| 3000 |
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, valuePtr); |
| 3001 |
|
} |
| 3002 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3003 |
|
} |
| 3004 |
|
|
| 3005 |
|
/* |
| 3006 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3007 |
|
* |
| 3008 |
|
* ParseFontNameObj -- |
| 3009 |
|
* |
| 3010 |
|
* Converts a object into a set of font attributes that can be used |
| 3011 |
|
* to construct a font. |
| 3012 |
|
* |
| 3013 |
|
* The string rep of the object can be one of the following forms: |
| 3014 |
|
* XLFD (see X documentation) |
| 3015 |
|
* "family [size] [style1 [style2 ...]" |
| 3016 |
|
* "-option value [-option value ...]" |
| 3017 |
|
* |
| 3018 |
|
* Results: |
| 3019 |
|
* The return value is TCL_ERROR if the object was syntactically |
| 3020 |
|
* invalid. In that case an error message is left in interp's |
| 3021 |
|
* result object. Otherwise, fills the font attribute buffer with |
| 3022 |
|
* the values parsed from the string and returns TCL_OK; |
| 3023 |
|
* |
| 3024 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3025 |
|
* None. |
| 3026 |
|
* |
| 3027 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3028 |
|
*/ |
| 3029 |
|
|
| 3030 |
|
static int |
| 3031 |
|
ParseFontNameObj(interp, tkwin, objPtr, faPtr) |
| 3032 |
|
Tcl_Interp *interp; /* Interp for error return. Must not be |
| 3033 |
|
* NULL. */ |
| 3034 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For display on which font is used. */ |
| 3035 |
|
Tcl_Obj *objPtr; /* Parseable font description object. */ |
| 3036 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Filled with attributes parsed from font |
| 3037 |
|
* name. Any attributes that were not |
| 3038 |
|
* specified in font name are filled with |
| 3039 |
|
* default values. */ |
| 3040 |
|
{ |
| 3041 |
|
char *dash; |
| 3042 |
|
int objc, result, i, n; |
| 3043 |
|
Tcl_Obj **objv; |
| 3044 |
|
char *string; |
| 3045 |
|
|
| 3046 |
|
TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr); |
| 3047 |
|
|
| 3048 |
|
string = Tcl_GetString(objPtr); |
| 3049 |
|
if (*string == '-') { |
| 3050 |
|
/* |
| 3051 |
|
* This may be an XLFD or an "-option value" string. |
| 3052 |
|
* |
| 3053 |
|
* If the string begins with "-*" or a "-foundry-family-*" pattern, |
| 3054 |
|
* then consider it an XLFD. |
| 3055 |
|
*/ |
| 3056 |
|
|
| 3057 |
|
if (string[1] == '*') { |
| 3058 |
|
goto xlfd; |
| 3059 |
|
} |
| 3060 |
|
dash = strchr(string + 1, '-'); |
| 3061 |
|
if ((dash != NULL) |
| 3062 |
|
&& (!isspace(UCHAR(dash[-1])))) { /* INTL: ISO space */ |
| 3063 |
|
goto xlfd; |
| 3064 |
|
} |
| 3065 |
|
|
| 3066 |
|
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3067 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3068 |
|
} |
| 3069 |
|
|
| 3070 |
|
return ConfigAttributesObj(interp, tkwin, objc, objv, faPtr); |
| 3071 |
|
} |
| 3072 |
|
|
| 3073 |
|
if (*string == '*') { |
| 3074 |
|
/* |
| 3075 |
|
* This is appears to be an XLFD. Under Unix, all valid XLFDs were |
| 3076 |
|
* already handled by TkpGetNativeFont. If we are here, either we |
| 3077 |
|
* have something that initially looks like an XLFD but isn't or we |
| 3078 |
|
* have encountered an XLFD on Windows or Mac. |
| 3079 |
|
*/ |
| 3080 |
|
|
| 3081 |
|
xlfd: |
| 3082 |
|
result = TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, NULL); |
| 3083 |
|
if (result == TCL_OK) { |
| 3084 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3085 |
|
} |
| 3086 |
|
} |
| 3087 |
|
|
| 3088 |
|
/* |
| 3089 |
|
* Wasn't an XLFD or "-option value" string. Try it as a |
| 3090 |
|
* "font size style" list. |
| 3091 |
|
*/ |
| 3092 |
|
|
| 3093 |
|
if ((Tcl_ListObjGetElements(NULL, objPtr, &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) |
| 3094 |
|
|| (objc < 1)) { |
| 3095 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "font \"", string, "\" doesn't exist", |
| 3096 |
|
(char *) NULL); |
| 3097 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3098 |
|
} |
| 3099 |
|
|
| 3100 |
|
faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(Tcl_GetString(objv[0])); |
| 3101 |
|
if (objc > 1) { |
| 3102 |
|
if (Tcl_GetIntFromObj(interp, objv[1], &n) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3103 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3104 |
|
} |
| 3105 |
|
faPtr->size = n; |
| 3106 |
|
} |
| 3107 |
|
|
| 3108 |
|
i = 2; |
| 3109 |
|
if (objc == 3) { |
| 3110 |
|
if (Tcl_ListObjGetElements(interp, objv[2], &objc, &objv) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3111 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3112 |
|
} |
| 3113 |
|
i = 0; |
| 3114 |
|
} |
| 3115 |
|
for ( ; i < objc; i++) { |
| 3116 |
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, weightMap, objv[i]); |
| 3117 |
|
if (n != TK_FW_UNKNOWN) { |
| 3118 |
|
faPtr->weight = n; |
| 3119 |
|
continue; |
| 3120 |
|
} |
| 3121 |
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, slantMap, objv[i]); |
| 3122 |
|
if (n != TK_FS_UNKNOWN) { |
| 3123 |
|
faPtr->slant = n; |
| 3124 |
|
continue; |
| 3125 |
|
} |
| 3126 |
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, underlineMap, objv[i]); |
| 3127 |
|
if (n != 0) { |
| 3128 |
|
faPtr->underline = n; |
| 3129 |
|
continue; |
| 3130 |
|
} |
| 3131 |
|
n = TkFindStateNumObj(NULL, NULL, overstrikeMap, objv[i]); |
| 3132 |
|
if (n != 0) { |
| 3133 |
|
faPtr->overstrike = n; |
| 3134 |
|
continue; |
| 3135 |
|
} |
| 3136 |
|
|
| 3137 |
|
/* |
| 3138 |
|
* Unknown style. |
| 3139 |
|
*/ |
| 3140 |
|
|
| 3141 |
|
Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown font style \"", |
| 3142 |
|
Tcl_GetString(objv[i]), "\"", (char *) NULL); |
| 3143 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3144 |
|
} |
| 3145 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3146 |
|
} |
| 3147 |
|
|
| 3148 |
|
/* |
| 3149 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3150 |
|
* |
| 3151 |
|
* NewChunk -- |
| 3152 |
|
* |
| 3153 |
|
* Helper function for Tk_ComputeTextLayout(). Encapsulates a |
| 3154 |
|
* measured set of characters in a chunk that can be quickly |
| 3155 |
|
* drawn. |
| 3156 |
|
* |
| 3157 |
|
* Results: |
| 3158 |
|
* A pointer to the new chunk in the text layout. |
| 3159 |
|
* |
| 3160 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3161 |
|
* The text layout is reallocated to hold more chunks as necessary. |
| 3162 |
|
* |
| 3163 |
|
* Currently, Tk_ComputeTextLayout() stores contiguous ranges of |
| 3164 |
|
* "normal" characters in a chunk, along with individual tab |
| 3165 |
|
* and newline chars in their own chunks. All characters in the |
| 3166 |
|
* text layout are accounted for. |
| 3167 |
|
* |
| 3168 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3169 |
|
*/ |
| 3170 |
|
static LayoutChunk * |
| 3171 |
|
NewChunk(layoutPtrPtr, maxPtr, start, numBytes, curX, newX, y) |
| 3172 |
|
TextLayout **layoutPtrPtr; |
| 3173 |
|
int *maxPtr; |
| 3174 |
|
CONST char *start; |
| 3175 |
|
int numBytes; |
| 3176 |
|
int curX; |
| 3177 |
|
int newX; |
| 3178 |
|
int y; |
| 3179 |
|
{ |
| 3180 |
|
TextLayout *layoutPtr; |
| 3181 |
|
LayoutChunk *chunkPtr; |
| 3182 |
|
int maxChunks, numChars; |
| 3183 |
|
size_t s; |
| 3184 |
|
|
| 3185 |
|
layoutPtr = *layoutPtrPtr; |
| 3186 |
|
maxChunks = *maxPtr; |
| 3187 |
|
if (layoutPtr->numChunks == maxChunks) { |
| 3188 |
|
maxChunks *= 2; |
| 3189 |
|
s = sizeof(TextLayout) + ((maxChunks - 1) * sizeof(LayoutChunk)); |
| 3190 |
|
layoutPtr = (TextLayout *) ckrealloc((char *) layoutPtr, s); |
| 3191 |
|
|
| 3192 |
|
*layoutPtrPtr = layoutPtr; |
| 3193 |
|
*maxPtr = maxChunks; |
| 3194 |
|
} |
| 3195 |
|
numChars = Tcl_NumUtfChars(start, numBytes); |
| 3196 |
|
chunkPtr = &layoutPtr->chunks[layoutPtr->numChunks]; |
| 3197 |
|
chunkPtr->start = start; |
| 3198 |
|
chunkPtr->numBytes = numBytes; |
| 3199 |
|
chunkPtr->numChars = numChars; |
| 3200 |
|
chunkPtr->numDisplayChars = numChars; |
| 3201 |
|
chunkPtr->x = curX; |
| 3202 |
|
chunkPtr->y = y; |
| 3203 |
|
chunkPtr->totalWidth = newX - curX; |
| 3204 |
|
chunkPtr->displayWidth = newX - curX; |
| 3205 |
|
layoutPtr->numChunks++; |
| 3206 |
|
|
| 3207 |
|
return chunkPtr; |
| 3208 |
|
} |
| 3209 |
|
|
| 3210 |
|
/* |
| 3211 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3212 |
|
* |
| 3213 |
|
* TkFontParseXLFD -- |
| 3214 |
|
* |
| 3215 |
|
* Break up a fully specified XLFD into a set of font attributes. |
| 3216 |
|
* |
| 3217 |
|
* Results: |
| 3218 |
|
* Return value is TCL_ERROR if string was not a fully specified XLFD. |
| 3219 |
|
* Otherwise, fills font attribute buffer with the values parsed |
| 3220 |
|
* from the XLFD and returns TCL_OK. |
| 3221 |
|
* |
| 3222 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3223 |
|
* None. |
| 3224 |
|
* |
| 3225 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3226 |
|
*/ |
| 3227 |
|
|
| 3228 |
|
int |
| 3229 |
|
TkFontParseXLFD(string, faPtr, xaPtr) |
| 3230 |
|
CONST char *string; /* Parseable font description string. */ |
| 3231 |
|
TkFontAttributes *faPtr; /* Filled with attributes parsed from font |
| 3232 |
|
* name. Any attributes that were not |
| 3233 |
|
* specified in font name are filled with |
| 3234 |
|
* default values. */ |
| 3235 |
|
TkXLFDAttributes *xaPtr; /* Filled with X-specific attributes parsed |
| 3236 |
|
* from font name. Any attributes that were |
| 3237 |
|
* not specified in font name are filled with |
| 3238 |
|
* default values. May be NULL if such |
| 3239 |
|
* information is not desired. */ |
| 3240 |
|
{ |
| 3241 |
|
char *src; |
| 3242 |
|
CONST char *str; |
| 3243 |
|
int i, j; |
| 3244 |
|
char *field[XLFD_NUMFIELDS + 2]; |
| 3245 |
|
Tcl_DString ds; |
| 3246 |
|
TkXLFDAttributes xa; |
| 3247 |
|
|
| 3248 |
|
if (xaPtr == NULL) { |
| 3249 |
|
xaPtr = &xa; |
| 3250 |
|
} |
| 3251 |
|
TkInitFontAttributes(faPtr); |
| 3252 |
|
TkInitXLFDAttributes(xaPtr); |
| 3253 |
|
|
| 3254 |
|
memset(field, '\0', sizeof(field)); |
| 3255 |
|
|
| 3256 |
|
str = string; |
| 3257 |
|
if (*str == '-') { |
| 3258 |
|
str++; |
| 3259 |
|
} |
| 3260 |
|
|
| 3261 |
|
Tcl_DStringInit(&ds); |
| 3262 |
|
Tcl_DStringAppend(&ds, (char *) str, -1); |
| 3263 |
|
src = Tcl_DStringValue(&ds); |
| 3264 |
|
|
| 3265 |
|
field[0] = src; |
| 3266 |
|
for (i = 0; *src != '\0'; src++) { |
| 3267 |
|
if (!(*src & 0x80) |
| 3268 |
|
&& Tcl_UniCharIsUpper(UCHAR(*src))) { |
| 3269 |
|
*src = (char) Tcl_UniCharToLower(UCHAR(*src)); |
| 3270 |
|
} |
| 3271 |
|
if (*src == '-') { |
| 3272 |
|
i++; |
| 3273 |
|
if (i == XLFD_NUMFIELDS) { |
| 3274 |
|
continue; |
| 3275 |
|
} |
| 3276 |
|
*src = '\0'; |
| 3277 |
|
field[i] = src + 1; |
| 3278 |
|
if (i > XLFD_NUMFIELDS) { |
| 3279 |
|
break; |
| 3280 |
|
} |
| 3281 |
|
} |
| 3282 |
|
} |
| 3283 |
|
|
| 3284 |
|
/* |
| 3285 |
|
* An XLFD of the form -adobe-times-medium-r-*-12-*-* is pretty common, |
| 3286 |
|
* but it is (strictly) malformed, because the first * is eliding both |
| 3287 |
|
* the Setwidth and the Addstyle fields. If the Addstyle field is a |
| 3288 |
|
* number, then assume the above incorrect form was used and shift all |
| 3289 |
|
* the rest of the fields right by one, so the number gets interpreted |
| 3290 |
|
* as a pixelsize. This fix is so that we don't get a million reports |
| 3291 |
|
* that "it works under X (as a native font name), but gives a syntax |
| 3292 |
|
* error under Windows (as a parsed set of attributes)". |
| 3293 |
|
*/ |
| 3294 |
|
|
| 3295 |
|
if ((i > XLFD_ADD_STYLE) && (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE]))) { |
| 3296 |
|
if (atoi(field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE]) != 0) { |
| 3297 |
|
for (j = XLFD_NUMFIELDS - 1; j >= XLFD_ADD_STYLE; j--) { |
| 3298 |
|
field[j + 1] = field[j]; |
| 3299 |
|
} |
| 3300 |
|
field[XLFD_ADD_STYLE] = NULL; |
| 3301 |
|
i++; |
| 3302 |
|
} |
| 3303 |
|
} |
| 3304 |
|
|
| 3305 |
|
/* |
| 3306 |
|
* Bail if we don't have enough of the fields (up to pointsize). |
| 3307 |
|
*/ |
| 3308 |
|
|
| 3309 |
|
if (i < XLFD_FAMILY) { |
| 3310 |
|
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds); |
| 3311 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3312 |
|
} |
| 3313 |
|
|
| 3314 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_FOUNDRY])) { |
| 3315 |
|
xaPtr->foundry = Tk_GetUid(field[XLFD_FOUNDRY]); |
| 3316 |
|
} |
| 3317 |
|
|
| 3318 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_FAMILY])) { |
| 3319 |
|
faPtr->family = Tk_GetUid(field[XLFD_FAMILY]); |
| 3320 |
|
} |
| 3321 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_WEIGHT])) { |
| 3322 |
|
faPtr->weight = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, xlfdWeightMap, |
| 3323 |
|
field[XLFD_WEIGHT]); |
| 3324 |
|
} |
| 3325 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_SLANT])) { |
| 3326 |
|
xaPtr->slant = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, xlfdSlantMap, |
| 3327 |
|
field[XLFD_SLANT]); |
| 3328 |
|
if (xaPtr->slant == TK_FS_ROMAN) { |
| 3329 |
|
faPtr->slant = TK_FS_ROMAN; |
| 3330 |
|
} else { |
| 3331 |
|
faPtr->slant = TK_FS_ITALIC; |
| 3332 |
|
} |
| 3333 |
|
} |
| 3334 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_SETWIDTH])) { |
| 3335 |
|
xaPtr->setwidth = TkFindStateNum(NULL, NULL, xlfdSetwidthMap, |
| 3336 |
|
field[XLFD_SETWIDTH]); |
| 3337 |
|
} |
| 3338 |
|
|
| 3339 |
|
/* XLFD_ADD_STYLE ignored. */ |
| 3340 |
|
|
| 3341 |
|
/* |
| 3342 |
|
* Pointsize in tenths of a point, but treat it as tenths of a pixel |
| 3343 |
|
* for historical compatibility. |
| 3344 |
|
*/ |
| 3345 |
|
|
| 3346 |
|
faPtr->size = 12; |
| 3347 |
|
|
| 3348 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE])) { |
| 3349 |
|
if (field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE][0] == '[') { |
| 3350 |
|
/* |
| 3351 |
|
* Some X fonts have the point size specified as follows: |
| 3352 |
|
* |
| 3353 |
|
* [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ] |
| 3354 |
|
* |
| 3355 |
|
* where N1 is the point size (in points, not decipoints!), and |
| 3356 |
|
* N2, N3, and N4 are some additional numbers that I don't know |
| 3357 |
|
* the purpose of, so I ignore them. |
| 3358 |
|
*/ |
| 3359 |
|
|
| 3360 |
|
faPtr->size = atoi(field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE] + 1); |
| 3361 |
|
} else if (Tcl_GetInt(NULL, field[XLFD_POINT_SIZE], |
| 3362 |
|
&faPtr->size) == TCL_OK) { |
| 3363 |
|
faPtr->size /= 10; |
| 3364 |
|
} else { |
| 3365 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3366 |
|
} |
| 3367 |
|
} |
| 3368 |
|
|
| 3369 |
|
/* |
| 3370 |
|
* Pixel height of font. If specified, overrides pointsize. |
| 3371 |
|
*/ |
| 3372 |
|
|
| 3373 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE])) { |
| 3374 |
|
if (field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE][0] == '[') { |
| 3375 |
|
/* |
| 3376 |
|
* Some X fonts have the pixel size specified as follows: |
| 3377 |
|
* |
| 3378 |
|
* [ N1 N2 N3 N4 ] |
| 3379 |
|
* |
| 3380 |
|
* where N1 is the pixel size, and where N2, N3, and N4 |
| 3381 |
|
* are some additional numbers that I don't know |
| 3382 |
|
* the purpose of, so I ignore them. |
| 3383 |
|
*/ |
| 3384 |
|
|
| 3385 |
|
faPtr->size = atoi(field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE] + 1); |
| 3386 |
|
} else if (Tcl_GetInt(NULL, field[XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE], |
| 3387 |
|
&faPtr->size) != TCL_OK) { |
| 3388 |
|
return TCL_ERROR; |
| 3389 |
|
} |
| 3390 |
|
} |
| 3391 |
|
|
| 3392 |
|
faPtr->size = -faPtr->size; |
| 3393 |
|
|
| 3394 |
|
/* XLFD_RESOLUTION_X ignored. */ |
| 3395 |
|
|
| 3396 |
|
/* XLFD_RESOLUTION_Y ignored. */ |
| 3397 |
|
|
| 3398 |
|
/* XLFD_SPACING ignored. */ |
| 3399 |
|
|
| 3400 |
|
/* XLFD_AVERAGE_WIDTH ignored. */ |
| 3401 |
|
|
| 3402 |
|
if (FieldSpecified(field[XLFD_CHARSET])) { |
| 3403 |
|
xaPtr->charset = Tk_GetUid(field[XLFD_CHARSET]); |
| 3404 |
|
} else { |
| 3405 |
|
xaPtr->charset = Tk_GetUid("iso8859-1"); |
| 3406 |
|
} |
| 3407 |
|
Tcl_DStringFree(&ds); |
| 3408 |
|
return TCL_OK; |
| 3409 |
|
} |
| 3410 |
|
|
| 3411 |
|
/* |
| 3412 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3413 |
|
* |
| 3414 |
|
* FieldSpecified -- |
| 3415 |
|
* |
| 3416 |
|
* Helper function for TkParseXLFD(). Determines if a field in the |
| 3417 |
|
* XLFD was set to a non-null, non-don't-care value. |
| 3418 |
|
* |
| 3419 |
|
* Results: |
| 3420 |
|
* The return value is 0 if the field in the XLFD was not set and |
| 3421 |
|
* should be ignored, non-zero otherwise. |
| 3422 |
|
* |
| 3423 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3424 |
|
* None. |
| 3425 |
|
* |
| 3426 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3427 |
|
*/ |
| 3428 |
|
|
| 3429 |
|
static int |
| 3430 |
|
FieldSpecified(field) |
| 3431 |
|
CONST char *field; /* The field of the XLFD to check. Strictly |
| 3432 |
|
* speaking, only when the string is "*" does it mean |
| 3433 |
|
* don't-care. However, an unspecified or question |
| 3434 |
|
* mark is also interpreted as don't-care. */ |
| 3435 |
|
{ |
| 3436 |
|
char ch; |
| 3437 |
|
|
| 3438 |
|
if (field == NULL) { |
| 3439 |
|
return 0; |
| 3440 |
|
} |
| 3441 |
|
ch = field[0]; |
| 3442 |
|
return (ch != '*' && ch != '?'); |
| 3443 |
|
} |
| 3444 |
|
|
| 3445 |
|
/* |
| 3446 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3447 |
|
* |
| 3448 |
|
* TkFontGetPixels -- |
| 3449 |
|
* |
| 3450 |
|
* Given a font size specification (as described in the TkFontAttributes |
| 3451 |
|
* structure) return the number of pixels it represents. |
| 3452 |
|
* |
| 3453 |
|
* Results: |
| 3454 |
|
* As above. |
| 3455 |
|
* |
| 3456 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3457 |
|
* None. |
| 3458 |
|
* |
| 3459 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3460 |
|
*/ |
| 3461 |
|
|
| 3462 |
|
int |
| 3463 |
|
TkFontGetPixels(tkwin, size) |
| 3464 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For point->pixel conversion factor. */ |
| 3465 |
|
int size; /* Font size. */ |
| 3466 |
|
{ |
| 3467 |
|
double d; |
| 3468 |
|
|
| 3469 |
|
if (size < 0) { |
| 3470 |
|
return -size; |
| 3471 |
|
} |
| 3472 |
|
|
| 3473 |
|
d = size * 25.4 / 72.0; |
| 3474 |
|
d *= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
| 3475 |
|
d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
| 3476 |
|
return (int) (d + 0.5); |
| 3477 |
|
} |
| 3478 |
|
|
| 3479 |
|
/* |
| 3480 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3481 |
|
* |
| 3482 |
|
* TkFontGetPoints -- |
| 3483 |
|
* |
| 3484 |
|
* Given a font size specification (as described in the TkFontAttributes |
| 3485 |
|
* structure) return the number of points it represents. |
| 3486 |
|
* |
| 3487 |
|
* Results: |
| 3488 |
|
* As above. |
| 3489 |
|
* |
| 3490 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3491 |
|
* None. |
| 3492 |
|
* |
| 3493 |
|
*--------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3494 |
|
*/ |
| 3495 |
|
|
| 3496 |
|
int |
| 3497 |
|
TkFontGetPoints(tkwin, size) |
| 3498 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* For pixel->point conversion factor. */ |
| 3499 |
|
int size; /* Font size. */ |
| 3500 |
|
{ |
| 3501 |
|
double d; |
| 3502 |
|
|
| 3503 |
|
if (size >= 0) { |
| 3504 |
|
return size; |
| 3505 |
|
} |
| 3506 |
|
|
| 3507 |
|
d = -size * 72.0 / 25.4; |
| 3508 |
|
d *= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
| 3509 |
|
d /= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)); |
| 3510 |
|
return (int) (d + 0.5); |
| 3511 |
|
} |
| 3512 |
|
|
| 3513 |
|
/* |
| 3514 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3515 |
|
* |
| 3516 |
|
* TkFontGetAliasList -- |
| 3517 |
|
* |
| 3518 |
|
* Given a font name, find the list of all aliases for that font |
| 3519 |
|
* name. One of the names in this list will probably be the name |
| 3520 |
|
* that this platform expects when asking for the font. |
| 3521 |
|
* |
| 3522 |
|
* Results: |
| 3523 |
|
* As above. The return value is NULL if the font name has no |
| 3524 |
|
* aliases. |
| 3525 |
|
* |
| 3526 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3527 |
|
* None. |
| 3528 |
|
* |
| 3529 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3530 |
|
*/ |
| 3531 |
|
|
| 3532 |
|
char ** |
| 3533 |
|
TkFontGetAliasList(faceName) |
| 3534 |
|
CONST char *faceName; /* Font name to test for aliases. */ |
| 3535 |
|
{ |
| 3536 |
|
int i, j; |
| 3537 |
|
|
| 3538 |
|
for (i = 0; fontAliases[i] != NULL; i++) { |
| 3539 |
|
for (j = 0; fontAliases[i][j] != NULL; j++) { |
| 3540 |
|
if (strcasecmp(faceName, fontAliases[i][j]) == 0) { |
| 3541 |
|
return fontAliases[i]; |
| 3542 |
|
} |
| 3543 |
|
} |
| 3544 |
|
} |
| 3545 |
|
return NULL; |
| 3546 |
|
} |
| 3547 |
|
|
| 3548 |
|
/* |
| 3549 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3550 |
|
* |
| 3551 |
|
* TkFontGetFallbacks -- |
| 3552 |
|
* |
| 3553 |
|
* Get the list of font fallbacks that the platform-specific code |
| 3554 |
|
* can use to try to find the closest matching font the name |
| 3555 |
|
* requested. |
| 3556 |
|
* |
| 3557 |
|
* Results: |
| 3558 |
|
* As above. |
| 3559 |
|
* |
| 3560 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3561 |
|
* None. |
| 3562 |
|
* |
| 3563 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3564 |
|
*/ |
| 3565 |
|
|
| 3566 |
|
char *** |
| 3567 |
|
TkFontGetFallbacks() |
| 3568 |
|
{ |
| 3569 |
|
return fontFallbacks; |
| 3570 |
|
} |
| 3571 |
|
|
| 3572 |
|
/* |
| 3573 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3574 |
|
* |
| 3575 |
|
* TkFontGetGlobalClass -- |
| 3576 |
|
* |
| 3577 |
|
* Get the list of fonts to try if the requested font name does not |
| 3578 |
|
* exist and no fallbacks for that font name could be used either. |
| 3579 |
|
* The names in this list are considered preferred over all the other |
| 3580 |
|
* font names in the system when looking for a last-ditch fallback. |
| 3581 |
|
* |
| 3582 |
|
* Results: |
| 3583 |
|
* As above. |
| 3584 |
|
* |
| 3585 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3586 |
|
* None. |
| 3587 |
|
* |
| 3588 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3589 |
|
*/ |
| 3590 |
|
|
| 3591 |
|
char ** |
| 3592 |
|
TkFontGetGlobalClass() |
| 3593 |
|
{ |
| 3594 |
|
return globalFontClass; |
| 3595 |
|
} |
| 3596 |
|
|
| 3597 |
|
/* |
| 3598 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3599 |
|
* |
| 3600 |
|
* TkFontGetSymbolClass -- |
| 3601 |
|
* |
| 3602 |
|
* Get the list of fonts that are symbolic; used if the operating |
| 3603 |
|
* system cannot apriori identify symbolic fonts on its own. |
| 3604 |
|
* |
| 3605 |
|
* Results: |
| 3606 |
|
* As above. |
| 3607 |
|
* |
| 3608 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3609 |
|
* None. |
| 3610 |
|
* |
| 3611 |
|
*------------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3612 |
|
*/ |
| 3613 |
|
|
| 3614 |
|
char ** |
| 3615 |
|
TkFontGetSymbolClass() |
| 3616 |
|
{ |
| 3617 |
|
return symbolClass; |
| 3618 |
|
} |
| 3619 |
|
|
| 3620 |
|
/* |
| 3621 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3622 |
|
* |
| 3623 |
|
* TkDebugFont -- |
| 3624 |
|
* |
| 3625 |
|
* This procedure returns debugging information about a font. |
| 3626 |
|
* |
| 3627 |
|
* Results: |
| 3628 |
|
* The return value is a list with one sublist for each TkFont |
| 3629 |
|
* corresponding to "name". Each sublist has two elements that |
| 3630 |
|
* contain the resourceRefCount and objRefCount fields from the |
| 3631 |
|
* TkFont structure. |
| 3632 |
|
* |
| 3633 |
|
* Side effects: |
| 3634 |
|
* None. |
| 3635 |
|
* |
| 3636 |
|
*---------------------------------------------------------------------- |
| 3637 |
|
*/ |
| 3638 |
|
|
| 3639 |
|
Tcl_Obj * |
| 3640 |
|
TkDebugFont(tkwin, name) |
| 3641 |
|
Tk_Window tkwin; /* The window in which the font will be |
| 3642 |
|
* used (not currently used). */ |
| 3643 |
|
char *name; /* Name of the desired color. */ |
| 3644 |
|
{ |
| 3645 |
|
TkFont *fontPtr; |
| 3646 |
|
Tcl_HashEntry *hashPtr; |
| 3647 |
|
Tcl_Obj *resultPtr, *objPtr; |
| 3648 |
|
|
| 3649 |
|
resultPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); |
| 3650 |
|
hashPtr = Tcl_FindHashEntry( |
| 3651 |
|
&((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr->fontInfoPtr->fontCache, name); |
| 3652 |
|
if (hashPtr != NULL) { |
| 3653 |
|
fontPtr = (TkFont *) Tcl_GetHashValue(hashPtr); |
| 3654 |
|
if (fontPtr == NULL) { |
| 3655 |
|
panic("TkDebugFont found empty hash table entry"); |
| 3656 |
|
} |
| 3657 |
|
for ( ; (fontPtr != NULL); fontPtr = fontPtr->nextPtr) { |
| 3658 |
|
objPtr = Tcl_NewObj(); |
| 3659 |
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
| 3660 |
|
Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->resourceRefCount)); |
| 3661 |
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, objPtr, |
| 3662 |
|
Tcl_NewIntObj(fontPtr->objRefCount)); |
| 3663 |
|
Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(NULL, resultPtr, objPtr); |
| 3664 |
|
} |
| 3665 |
|
} |
| 3666 |
|
return resultPtr; |
| 3667 |
|
} |
| 3668 |
|
|
| 3669 |
|
/* End of tkfont.c */ |
Parent Directory
| 
Revision Log
| 
Patch